JP2021003185A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that prevents a notification from causing a player to lose expectation.SOLUTION: In a second display pattern, a meter image (suggestion display) is displayed on an image display device 5 in a prescribed time after the start of variable display, and a meter indication in the meter image increases stepwise without reaching MAX until the variable display terminates. Here, at the termination of the variable display, a continuation notification is performed which notifies that a suggestion display performance continues also in next variable display. In this way, the second display pattern causes the continuation notification of the suggestion display performance to be performed at the termination time of the variable display, and thus can prevent a player from losing expectation for the variable display in contrast to the case where the continuation notification is performed before the termination of the variable display. In other words, expectation for the suggestion display performance can be maintained until the termination of the variable display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-2

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A meter that suggests the presence or absence of super reach, etc. by displaying a horizontally long meter image including a plurality of lamp images during one variable display of a decorative pattern and displaying each lamp image in order from the leftmost lamp image. A game machine that executes a notice effect has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-189709

When the effect of displaying the meter image is executed over a plurality of variable displays, it depends on the timing of notifying that the effect of displaying the meter image is continued in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the effect. Then, there is a risk that the expectation in the variable display will be reduced and the interest will be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that prevents the player's expectation from being reduced by notification.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
Variable display can be executed, and it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantage setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantage for the player over the disadvantage setting value. Is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 82AK) capable of setting any setting value from a plurality of setting values including a high advantageous setting value (for example, 4 to 6).
It is possible to display a suggestion display (for example, meter image 82AK001) whose display mode can be changed stepwise, and a specific effect (for example, pseudo-ream, super reach) according to the change in the display mode of the suggestion display to a specific stage. , An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 82AKS002 or step S172) capable of executing the cut-in effect during reach).
The effect executing means has a first display pattern that changes to the specific stage during the variable display when the display of the suggestion display is started, and from the specific stage during the variable display when the display of the suggestion display is started. The suggestion display can be displayed in any pattern including at least a second display pattern that changes to the previous stage and changes to the specific stage during the variable display after the variable display (for example). 10-2, 10-9, 10-10),
The specific effect is an effect that is executed over a predetermined period while suggesting the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state.
When the suggestion display is displayed in the second display pattern, the effect executing means takes a shorter period than the predetermined period after the suggestion display changes in the variable display in which the suggestion display is started. When the variable display ends and the variable display ends, a notification is given to the effect that the suggestion display continues to be displayed (for example, FIG. 10-2).
further,
Determining means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 5) and
A suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled based on the determination result of the determination means includes a specific suggestion effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-3). With a suggestion effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-18 and then executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7) that can be executed in a mode not included. ,
With
The suggestion effect execution means
When the disadvantage setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect cannot be executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-21 (B), if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-. Infeasible part in 3),
When the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggestion effect in an aspect including the specific suggestion effect can be executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-21 (C) to 11-21 (E), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display result is out of order. , The part where the cut-in effect can be performed with pattern CI-3),
When the suggestion effect is executed, a special pattern (supermarket that executes the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 11-6) is notified that the suggestion effect is controlled after it is once suggested that the advantage state is not controlled. Has a variation pattern of reach γ jackpot (PB1-5)),
When the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the aspect including the specific suggestion effect is the ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the aspect not including the specific suggestion effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 (A) to 11-21 (E), when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the revival effect is performed. The part where the ratio of executing the cut-in effect with the pattern CI-3 is set lower than when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by performing the notification according to the end of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the feeling of expectation from being reduced by the notification, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. In addition, when it is suggested that the suggestion effect including the specific suggestion effect is executed and the advantageous state is not controlled, the advantageous state is set in the special pattern even though the player recognizes that the advantageous set value is set. By notifying that the game is controlled by the player, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in the recognition.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display before execution, overlapping with the period in which the notification to the effect that the suggestion display continues is performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120) that executes the processes of step 82AKS003 and step S172 is provided.
When the advance notice effect (for example, the pre-reading advance notice effect of the stop symbol advance notice) is executed, the notification that the suggestion display is continued is higher than when the advance notice effect is not executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when there is a suggestion display, the execution rate of the stop symbol notice is higher than when there is no suggestion display).
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the suggestion display.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
After the notification that the display of the suggestion display is continued is executed, the display related to the notification may be deleted according to the start timing of the next variable display (for example, FIG. 10-10).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the next variable display from being reduced.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
Variable display can be executed in a plurality of variable display areas (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R).
The effect executing means can execute the notification that the display of the suggestion display is continued at the timing when the variable display of the variable display area at the end of the plurality of variable display areas ends. (For example, FIG. 10-10) may be used.
With such a configuration, the expectation can be maintained until the final timing of the variable display.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the specific effect, and the ratio of displaying the suggestion display differs depending on the type of the specific effect to be executed (for example, FIG. 10-3 (A)). You may.
With such a configuration, it is possible to have a sense of expectation as to which specific effect will be executed.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
The effect executing means can display a plurality of the suggestion displays at the same time.
When a plurality of the suggestion displays are displayed at the same time, the type of the specific effect executed when the plurality of suggestion displays change to the specific stage may be different from each other.
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
One of a plurality of stages of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a value from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player). Setting means that can be set to the set value of (for example, CPU 103 that executes the set value change process) and
It is provided with a setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 063AKS007) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that makes a suggestion regarding the set value in a predetermined period.
The setting value of the plurality of steps includes at least a first setting value and a second setting value which is more disadvantageous than the first setting value (for example, 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player is most advantageous to the player). (Values up to 6 etc.),
In the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect, a first mode in which the ratio selected when the first set value is set is high and a ratio selected when the second set value is set are included. A high second aspect is included (for example, in "aspect 1", the higher the set setting value is, the higher the rate of determination is increased, while in "aspect 2", the set value is set. The lower the rate, the higher the rate of determination),
The setting suggestion effect executing means executes the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect for a longer period of time than the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect (for example, T2> T5 as shown in FIG. 10-8). You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, which suggests that the setting value is advantageous, is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the following gaming machines (8) to (16). Conventionally, in a game machine, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902, and any setting. There were some that could execute an effect (specific suggestion effect) that suggests whether a value is set. In such a game machine, the variable display result is not a big hit (it is not controlled to the advantageous state) because the variable display result is out of alignment (not controlled to the advantageous state) by executing the specific suggestion effect. Instead, it is conceivable to notify that the set value set in the game machine is an advantageous set value (advantageous set value) for the player and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. However, there are some game machines that can execute an effect (special pattern) for notifying that the variable display result will be a big hit after suggesting that the variable display result will be out of order. Therefore, in such a game machine, even if a specific suggestion effect is executed and it is suggested that the variable display result is out of order, if it is notified again that the variable display result will be a big hit, it is set to be advantageous to the game machine. Although the player recognizes that the value is set, there is a problem that the game interest is deteriorated due to the recognition being incorrect. In view of this point, the game machine that can reduce the decrease in the game interest. Is required to be provided.

(8) It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantage setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantageous setting that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values including values (for example, 4 to 6).
Determining means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 5) and
A suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled based on the determination result of the determination means includes a specific suggestion effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-3). With a suggestion effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-18 and then executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7) that can be executed in a mode not included. ,
With
The suggestion effect execution means
When the disadvantage setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect cannot be executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-21 (B), if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-. Infeasible part in 3),
When the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggestion effect in an aspect including the specific suggestion effect can be executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-21 (C) to 11-21 (E), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display result is out of order. , The part where the cut-in effect can be performed with pattern CI-3),
When the suggestion effect is executed, a special pattern (supermarket that executes the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 11-6) is notified that the suggestion effect is controlled after it is once suggested that the advantage state is not controlled. Has a variation pattern of reach γ jackpot (PB1-5)),
When the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the aspect including the specific suggestion effect is the ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the aspect not including the specific suggestion effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 (A) to 11-21 (E), when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the revival effect is performed. The part where the ratio of executing the cut-in effect with the pattern CI-3 is set lower than when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when it is suggested that the suggestion effect including the specific suggestion effect is executed and is not controlled to the advantageous state, the special pattern is recognized even though the player recognizes that the advantageous setting value is set. By notifying that the player is controlled in an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce a decrease in the game interest due to an error in the recognition.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above
The advantageous setting value includes a first advantageous setting value (for example, 4 or 5) and a second advantageous setting value (for example, 6) that is more advantageous for the player than the first advantageous setting value.
When the second advantageous setting value is set, the suggestion effect executing means sets the first advantageous setting value when it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to carry out the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect at a higher rate than when it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 11-21). As shown in FIGS. 11-21 (E), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the variable display is displayed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line. When it is executed, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and it is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the set value is 4, the part where the ratio of cut-in effect executed in pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be expected that the second advantageous setting value is set because the specific suggestion effect is executed frequently and is not controlled to the advantageous state. Can be improved.

(10) In the game machine of (8) or (9) above
Regardless of which set value is set, the rate at which the special pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to be controlled in the advantageous state is the same (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-13 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is used by the CPU 103 using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table of 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Part to determine)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the rate at which the special pattern is executed follows a set value that determines the rate at which it is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, so that the player can pay attention to the special pattern. You can improve your interest.

(11) In any of the game machines (8) to (10) above,
A special notification effect executing means (for example, an effect) capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-4) for notifying that the effect is different from the specific suggestion effect and is controlled to the advantageous state. The control CPU 120 includes a portion that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7 after executing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-18).
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A and jackpot B) and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot C) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Including
When the special notification effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, the cut-in effect is controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-. When executed in 4, the variable display result is always a big hit and is controlled to the big hit game state of big hit C),
When the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 11-21 and 11). As shown in -22, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, it is controlled to be one of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C. part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether or not the special notification effect is executed, and the suggestion effect including the specific suggestion effect may be executed and controlled to the second advantageous state. , When the advantageous setting value is set, the suggestion effect including the specific suggestion effect is executed, and the decrease in the game interest when the advantageous state is not controlled can be reduced.

(12) In any of the game machines (8) to (11) above,
The suggestion effect executing means has the same mode as the specific suggestion effect, in addition to the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of the super reach γ) that can be executed in the mode including the specific suggestion effect and the mode not including the specific suggestion effect. A second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach δ) that can be executed in a mode including a certain similar effect (for example, a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight) can be executed as the suggestion effect.
When the second suggestion effect is executed, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-22, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ. If so, the part where the variable display result is a big hit)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the variation of the suggestion effect increases, attention should be paid to whether or not the suggestion effect to be executed is the second suggestion effect in which the same effect as the specific suggestion effect is executed and controlled in an advantageous state. Because it can be made to play, the game entertainment can be improved.

(13) In any of the game machines (8) to (12) above,
When the suggestion effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state by the special pattern, the suggestion effect execution means does not execute the suggestion effect in an aspect including the specific suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 11-33 as a modification 208SG-1 (for example, FIG. 11-33). As shown in A) to 11-33 (E), when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PB1-5) in which the revival effect is executed, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the pattern CI-3. Part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when it is suggested that the suggestion effect including the specific suggestion effect is executed and is not controlled to the advantageous state, the special pattern is recognized even though the player recognizes that the advantageous setting value is set. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to being notified that the game is controlled in an advantageous state.

(14) In any of the game machines (8) to (13) above,
As a predetermined effect (for example, a notice effect) that is different from the specific suggestion effect and suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the first predetermined effect (for example, pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the second predetermined effect (for example, pattern YE-3) suggesting that the first predetermined effect is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate. The portion that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7 after executing the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-25) is provided.
When the predetermined effect executing means is set to the advantageous set value and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect is included in the specific suggestion effect. Is executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-26, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, when the advance notice effect is executed, the patterns YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 with a high expectation of a big hit are used. The production pattern is determined from the production patterns to be excluded (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the specific suggestion effect and the second predetermined effect are controlled to the advantageous state is excessively increased even though the specific suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. Can be prevented.

(15) In any of the game machines (8) to (14) above,
A special effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a notice effect of pattern YE-4) for notifying that the effect is different from the specific suggestion effect and is controlled to the advantageous state. Is provided with a portion that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7 after executing the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-25).
The special effect executing means limits the execution of the special effect when the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect is executed when controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 11-26 (A). ), When the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the advance notice effect is given. When executing, the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized in advance that the special effect is controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special effect when the specific suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is controlled, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(16) In any of the game machines (8) to (15) above,
As gaming states different from the advantageous state, a first gaming state (for example, a low probability low base state and a low probability high base state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled by (high accuracy and high base state).
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14, the CPU 103 is in the gaming state. Regardless of the fluctuation pattern of super reach selectable part),
When the advantageous setting value is set and the determination means has not determined that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect is executed in the second gaming state. The ratio to be played is higher than the ratio at which the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect is executed in the first gaming state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-21, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. If the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of super reach γ, if the set values are the same, the cut is performed in the high accuracy and high base state. The rate at which the in-effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set higher than the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second gaming state, the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific suggestion effect that is not controlled by the advantageous state indicating that the advantageous set value is set is more easily executed than in the first game state. , The hobby of the second game state can be improved.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probabilistic state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probabilistic state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the game control main process. It is a flowchart or the like which shows the random value value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display result determination module. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the look-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination ratio such as whether or not the look-ahead chance eye is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process such as a non-reach loss stop symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a predetermined display determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of whether or not the predetermined display is executed and the determination ratio thereof. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the type of a predetermined display and its determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a final variation effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the production operation example in the case where the predetermined display and the count value display for each type are performed. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit and the numerical range of a small hit in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed and the determination ratio. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect and the determination ratio. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ending effect operation control processing with setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the waiting process per special figure. It is a time chart which shows the execution period such as an ending effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the ending effect and the like are executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process of the feature part 82AK. It is a timing chart of the suggestion display effect of the feature part 82AK. It is a figure which shows the execution rate and the decision rate of the suggestion display effect. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the lookahead notice effect. It is a figure which shows the decision rate of the chance eye. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion display effect determination process of the feature part 82AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the suggestion display effect pattern (gase). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the end of a change of a feature part 82AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 82AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 82AK. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the production pattern of a cut-in effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio in the cut-in effect pattern CI-3. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern, and is explanatory drawing of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the advance notice effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the cut-in effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the variable display result for every variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern in a modification 208SG-4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-5. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-6. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the set value suggestion effect and the execution decision ratio of the set value suggestion effect in the modification 208SG-7.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than in the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) intervals, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this process during opening of the big hit, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the large winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the large winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 048AK)
Next, the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIG. 8-1, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame formed in a vertically long square frame shape, a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface, and a game. It is composed of a gaming machine frame (underframe) that supports and fixes the board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame, a glass door frame having a glass window can rotate between a door opening position that opens the front surface of the game machine frame and a door closing position that closes the front surface centering on the left side. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame is closed.

In addition, the frame for the game machine can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the frame for the game machine and the glass door frame. It is not possible to open the door.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a first reserved storage display area 207SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 207SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 207SG005D and the second hold storage display area 207SG005U, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is a game. It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the ball can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is the left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

Although not shown, the main board 11 in the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 207SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is mounted on the back of. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that the substrate case 207SG201 can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the frame closed, and a predetermined door key is used. The operation becomes possible by opening the frame for the gaming machine. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 207SG051. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. It may be good (the same applies to the following feature part 063AK). Further, the set set value is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side as a set value designation command (the same applies to the following feature unit 063AK).

8-2 (A) to 8-2 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and out of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure (set value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the gaming state Is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 when is in a normal state or a time saving state, and of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 to 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, FIGS. 8-2 (A), 8-3 (A), 8-4 (A), 8-5 (A), 8-6 (A), 8-7 (Fig. 8-7). As shown in A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, FIG. 8-2 (B), FIG. 8-3 (B), FIG. 8-4 (B), FIG. 8-5 (B), FIG. 8-6 (B), FIG. 8-7 ( As shown in B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, there is a probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. It is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the case, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. ..

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-11, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as a reference regardless of the game state and the set value. The judgment value included in the common numerical range or the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the hit judgment is made regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) with the value 32767 as a reference as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to make A to big hit F). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-2 (A) to 8-7 (B) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined). Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. Further, the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to a probability change state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the jackpot type in the feature portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12. FIG. 8-12 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as the big hit type in the first special figure and the second special figure, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed after the end of the big hit game, and the big hit shifts to the high accuracy high base state. The jackpot types from A to jackpot F (also called probabilistic jackpot) are set. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, once a big hit is made, 100% probability variation control is performed. It should be noted that, in either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure, only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state, and the big hit G (also referred to as non-probable variable big hit) shifts to the low probability high base state. The jackpot type of jackpot H and the jackpot type of jackpot H that the probability variation control continues (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) until the next jackpot may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither high accuracy control nor time saving control is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed eight times (so-called eight rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player (so-called two rounds). It is a so-called "sudden" jackpot). In addition, the big hit game state by "big hit D" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by the "big hit E" is a normally open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit F" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player (so-called two rounds). It is a so-called "sudden" jackpot).

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control (probability variation state) executed after the end of the jackpot game states of "big hit A" to "big hit F" are performed a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game state (features of this embodiment). Part 048AK ends when the special figure game (100 times) is executed, or when the big hit game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Therefore, when the big hit occurs again, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state, so-called consecutive villas. It becomes a state.

For example, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of determining the so-called sudden big hit such as the big hit C or the big hit F may be lowered in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, the ball ejection rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the ball ejection rate decreases as the set value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Just do it. In addition to this, the ratio of the jackpot type determined according to the set value may be different. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the ball output rate for the player. As described above, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the game control main process performed in the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, A process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed according to the state of the lock switch.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round indicator are turned on from the start of each process, and the first hold indicator 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the clerk of the game hall, etc., is changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display 1 may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the big hits A to F shown. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in the state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Performs processing according to each (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear processing, data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag is cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing the data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It may be possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error may be executed by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

According to this, when an abnormal set value is set or when the setting value is changed and the power is restored from the power failure, an error due to the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, or the second special symbol display device 4B occurs. Since the occurrence notification of the above is executed, the clerk of the amusement park can recognize from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the pachinko machine 1 has recovered from the power failure while changing the set value. It becomes. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. Become.

FIG. 8-14 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in the process of step S101 of FIG. 5 as a winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 048AK, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. 8-15) described later. The result) is set as "big hit" to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" to determine whether to control to the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes this winning random number value determination process at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). , It is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. .. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes the look-ahead advance notice effect such as the hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-14, the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to perform. Identify the current gaming state (207SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the first address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-14 (B)) and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 8-16, a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and a random number value MR1 for determining the specified special figure display result. It is compared with the data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS571). At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that the jackpot is in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, when it is determined by the 207SGS572 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS572; N), the small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result (207SGS573), and the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the predetermined small hit determination range. It is determined whether or not it is within (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the numerical data is a small hit in the variable display (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined by the 207SGS574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit is not achieved in the variable display (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display is out of range (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 8-14 (A), it is confirmed by 207SGS575 whether or not it is determined that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526), and when it is determined that the large hit is not obtained (207SGS526; N), in the variable display in 207SGS525. When it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527) and it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of order (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "out of order". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (207SGS527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. (207SGS528).

When the 207SGS526 determines that a big hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the jackpot is A, a third symbol designation command when the jackpot is B, and a fourth symbol when the jackpot is C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command, the fifth symbol designation command when it is a jackpot D, the sixth symbol designation command when it is a jackpot E, and the seventh symbol designation command when it is a jackpot F (207SGS534). ), Then, as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern, a jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set (207SGS535), and the process proceeds to 207SGS536.

Further, when the 207SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the eighth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the variation pattern determination table for small hits (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

If the time reduction flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (207SGS529), and if the time reduction flag is set (207SGS528; Y). ), The deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set (207SGS530). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 048AK, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 is determined. Table B and the deviation pattern determination table C used when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more are prepared in advance, but in the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach variation pattern is used. On the other hand, in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, 1 to 450 when the set value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the set value is 2, and 1 to 1 when the set value is 3. 410, when the set value is 4, 1-390 is assigned, when the set value is 5, 1-370 is assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1-350 are assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, for non-reach variation patterns, the set value is 1 to 500 when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. 2 is 1 to 480, 3 is 1 to 460, 4 is 1 to 440, 5 is 1 to 420, and 6 is 1 to 1. 400 are assigned to each.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C and the deviation pattern determination table D, when the set value is 1 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take for the non-reach variation pattern. 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, set. When the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the deviation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 of the range that the random value MR3 for motion pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned regardless of the set value. There is.

Therefore, in the 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, the non-reach and super reach determinations are determined by changing the number of reserved memories after the determination. Is always a non-reach or super-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D. ..

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (207SGS536). In this feature unit 048AK, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), when at least the variable display result is “off”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable category other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is terminated. The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the number of second special symbol hold storage is "0" (207SGS541). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of the 207SGS541, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in the 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of 207SGS542, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 207SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer to "2" (207SGS544), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (207SGS545). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the processing of the 207SGS545, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads out the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Good. As described above, the processing of the 207SGS545 is executed when the 207SGS541 determines that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and whether or not the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Is determined. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of the first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in the 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". , The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of the 207SGS546, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 207SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS547).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer to "1" (207SGS548), the process shifts to 207SGS549.

In the 207SGS549, for example, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 or the like (207SGS549). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of the 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the start address of the RAM 102 and specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used set value is stored (207SGS551). When it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the set value specified by 207SGS550 is compared with the stored determined used set value (207SGS552), and the specified set value It is determined whether or not the determined used set value stored in the above is the same (207SGS553).

When it is determined in the 207SGS553 that the specified set value and the stored determination used set value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error specification command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is issued to the effect control board 12. Along with making settings for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop is performed. Enter the process. After that, since the CPU 103 does not execute other processing, the pachinko gaming machine is put into a non-gaming state (non-gaming state) by the loop processing. The error designation command is transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is stored in the set value (determined used set value) referred to when the previous variable display is executed and the current address of the head of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game hall can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the start address of the RAM 102 are different, so that the pachinko game can be played. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to be in a non-gamable state by executing the loop processing and not executing other processing. The CPU 103 does not limit the launch of the game ball, and even if the game ball wins a prize at each winning opening, the prize ball is not paid out or the special symbol is not variably displayed. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-gamable state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, it is regarded as an abnormality that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, and the abnormality is detected in the management device of the amusement park. Although the recognizable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B are blinked, or " By displaying "E.", the abnormality may be notified to the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 and the game is played. Although the embodiment in which the security signal is output to the field management device only once is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmission of these error specification commands and the output of the security signal are illustrated. May be repeatedly executed at predetermined period intervals in the above-mentioned incapacitated state.

Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the feature unit 048AK, if the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a non-gamable state. Although the mode to be controlled has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 performs a pachinko game. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 so that it cannot be played.

Further, when the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the start address of the RAM 102 are different and the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inoperable state by the CPU 103 is not executed, for example, the game hall Only the output of the security signal to the management device of the above may be executed, or the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored in the start address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the start address of the RAM 102, which is the most disadvantageous value for the player (this). By setting 1) in the feature unit 048AK of the embodiment, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

Judgment in 207SGS551 When it is determined that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553. If it is determined that the used setting value is the same as the stored determination used setting value (207SGS553: Y), the special figure display result determination table according to the current game state, start port buffer value, and set value is selected. And set (207SGS556). After that, the same process as the process executed in the variable display result determination module in the 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), that is, the process of 207SGS571 to 207SGS557 shown in FIG. 8-16 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a big hit (207SGS558), and when it is determined that the variable display is not a big hit (207SGS558; N), whether or not the 207SGS557 determines that the variable display is a small hit. Is confirmed (207SGS559).

When the 207SGS558 determines that a big hit will occur in the variable display (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 8-12 (A) and 8-12 (B) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer and "big hit A" to "big hit F" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be according to the determination ratio shown in the figure according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of the above is matched (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of the 207SGS563, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be changed to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. Whether to control is decided before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, the jackpot type may be set to "1" to "6" according to "big hit A" to "big hit F".

On the other hand, when the 207SGS559 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS560 and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS560). ..

On the other hand, if the 207SGS559 does not determine that a small hit is obtained in the variable display, that is, if the variable display is not correct (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In the 207SGS565, whether or not to control the big hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) is determined in advance, and whether or not to control the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set). In addition to the pre-determined result of the above, the finalized special symbol is set according to the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" by 207SGS558, for example, when the big hit type in 207SGS563 is "big hit A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. Set to. When the jackpot type is "big hit B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the finalized special symbol. In addition, when the special figure display result is determined to be "small hit" by 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set in 207SGS560), the special figure display result is set to "small hit" in advance. Corresponding to the determination result, the special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is the small hit symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the fixed special symbol is set in the 207SGS565, the set value specified in the 207SGS553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), and then the value of the special figure process flag is set to the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process. After updating to "1" (207SGS567), the special symbol normal processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol is normal. End the process. In this demo display setting, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, for example, is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Since the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment stores the determined used setting value as one of the game information in the RAM 102, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the first variable Although the mode in which the judgment used setting value does not exist when the display is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the judgment used setting value is cleared by the RAM clear process in the RAM 102. By storing in the area that is not set, even if the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is determined when the first variable display is executed. The used setting value and the setting stored in the start address of the RAM 102. The values (set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) may be compared.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, a mode in which the variable display result is determined by using the variable display result determination module that executes common processing is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module is provided with a set value specified by the CPU 103 (a set value stored at the start address of the RAM 102) and a determined used set value. Control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the process to be compared (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIGS. 8-15) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the process do not match the determined used set value. Processing (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value and the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determined use as the processing result are used. Since it is possible to execute the process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state when the set values do not match, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing an example of a process (process in the pre-reading notice setting process) performed in the pre-reading notice setting process in step S161 of FIG. 7. In the process in the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 8-17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received this time (step 048AKS001). If no new start winning command is received (step 048AKS001; No), the look-ahead notice is not executed, so the process in the look-ahead notice setting process ends.

When a new start winning command is received (step 048AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "1" (step 048AKS002), and the new start winning command is received. When the hold display number corresponding to the start winning command received in is "1" (step 048AKS002; Yes), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is not "1" (in the case of "2" to "4") (step 048AKS002; No), the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is satisfied. It is determined whether or not (step 048AKS003). The execution prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead notice, and here, the winning judgment result specification command included in the newly received start winning command specifies "no judgment". When, that is, when there is a judgment other than "non-reach" in the variable display executed before the target (the contents of the start winning command buffer are checked, and the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is displayed. When each winning judgment result specification command of the previous hold display number or the newly received start winning command is the first starting winning command, each winning command stored in the second starting winning command buffer This is a condition that is satisfied when there is a command that specifies a winning judgment result (judgment result equal to or higher than reach) other than "non-reach" in the judgment result specification command. The execution prohibition condition is also satisfied when it is already determined to execute the look-ahead chance eye in the variable display executed before the target (when the look-ahead chance eye flag described later is on). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by preventing the pre-reading chances for a plurality of targets from being executed. In addition to this, the look-ahead chance may be executed when the target is reach or higher. In addition, executing the look-ahead chance eye means executing the look-ahead notice effect by displaying the look-ahead chance eye.

When the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is satisfied (step 048AKS003; Yes), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the execution prohibition condition of the look-ahead notice is not satisfied (step 048AKS003; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS004). Specifically, in step 048AKS004, whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance eye according to the winning determination result and the type of the look-ahead chance eye when executing are determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-18. In the feature unit 048AK, as shown in FIG. 8-18, any one of “no execution”, “look-ahead chance eye A”, and “look-ahead chance eye B” is determined by the determined determination ratio shown in the figure. The look-ahead chance eye is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice, and the variable display of the decorative symbol executed before the target (when a plurality of variable displays are executed, each of the plurality of variable displays) is variablely displayed. As a result, it is an effect of deriving and displaying a predetermined chance eye (a non-reach chance eye when the reach is not established in the variable display).

In the feature unit 048AK, two types of look-ahead chance eyes are prepared, one is "look-ahead chance eye A" and the other is "look-ahead chance eye B". The "look-ahead chance eye A" and the "look-ahead chance eye B" have different target jackpot expectations and different chance eyes to stop (as shown in FIG. 8-18, the look-ahead chance eye A has "234". The predetermined chance eye is stopped, and in the look-ahead chance eye B, the predetermined chance eye of "345" is stopped.). It should be noted that the decorative pattern may be made to emit light when the chance eye is stopped. In this case, the "look-ahead chance eye A" and the "look-ahead chance eye B" are distinguished from each other by using different emission colors. You may try to do it. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher when the "look-ahead chance eye B" is executed than when the "look-ahead chance eye A" is executed.

In addition to this, for example, the determination ratio of the display result derived and displayed as the look-ahead chance may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case where a look-ahead chance eye is configured by a combination of odd-numbered decorative symbols such as 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, the combination of "315" (Saikou) is a look-ahead chance only when the set value is "6". It may be derived and displayed as an eye. Further, for example, in the case of a low setting, a combination in which the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number, such as "133", "155", and "377", is derived and displayed as a look-ahead chance eye. (In addition, since the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number in the predetermined display described later, in that case, one of them is referred to as the middle symbol so that the look-ahead chance eye and the predetermined display can be distinguished. Instead of the right symbol, the left symbol and the middle symbol may have the same number), and if the setting is high, the look-ahead chances are the same, such as "135", "357", and "379". It is also possible to increase the proportion of so-called combinations that do not include numbers and are derived and displayed. That is, the set value may be suggested according to the type of the pre-reading chance eye that is derived and displayed (the pre-reading chance eye may include the setting suggestion effect).

After returning to FIG. 8-17 and executing the process of step 048AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS005). When the look-ahead chance eye is not executed (step 048AKS005; No), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process ends. When executing the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS005; Yes), after setting the look-ahead chance eye flag indicating that the look-ahead chance eye is executed to the on state (step 048AKS006), the process in the look-ahead notice setting process ends. .. The look-ahead chance eye flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

In addition, for example, a hold display notice effect is given to the hold of the target of the look-ahead chance so that the player can visually recognize which is the target of the look-ahead chance, and the target of the look-ahead chance is. The display mode of the hold display may be changed to a mode different from the normal mode. That is, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, the hold display notice effect may be executed at the same time. In addition, the hold display notice may be executed separately from the look-ahead chance eye.

FIG. 8-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the feature unit 048AK. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-19, the effect control CPU 120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, so that the special figure display result is "missed". It is determined whether or not the result is (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S521; Yes), for example, the specified fluctuation pattern is read by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Determines whether or not is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" (step S522).

When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the look-ahead chance eye, the predetermined display, and the like are used as a combination of the final stop symbols that constitute the non-reach combination. Which of the displays other than the above is derived and displayed is determined by the non-reach loss stop symbol or the like determination process (step 048AKS010).

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process executed in step 048AKS010 of FIG. 8-19. In the process of determining the non-reach loss stop symbol or the like shown in FIG. 8-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the look-ahead chance eye flag is set to the ON state (step 048AKS011). When the look-ahead chance eye flag is on (step 048AKS011; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 has a look-ahead chance eye of the type determined in step 048AKS004 of FIG. The decorative symbol of ", and the decorative symbol of" 345 "corresponding to the look-ahead chance B) are determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS012).

After executing the process of step 048AKS012, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation is immediately before the variation targeted at the look-ahead chance (the variation immediately before the target) (step 048AKS013). If it is not the change immediately before the target, the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation immediately before the target (step 048AKS013; Yes), the look-ahead chance eye flag is cleared to the off state (step 048AKS014) so that the look-ahead chance eye is not derived and displayed in the target change. Reach loss stop The process of determining the symbol, etc. is completed. Note that, for example, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed only when the target fluctuation is a fluctuation equal to or greater than the reach (when the look-ahead chance eye is not executed when the target fluctuation is a non-reach fluctuation), the target The look-ahead chance eye flag may be cleared to the off state at the end of the fluctuation of. In this way, the look-ahead chance eyes are continuously displayed from the time when the look-ahead chance eyes flag is set to the ON state to the change immediately before the change of the target. In addition, a plurality of fluctuations for displaying the look-ahead chance eyes are prepared in advance as a pattern (for example, when the target fluctuation is the fourth fluctuation and the target is changed three times, the first and third look-ahead chances are performed. A pattern for displaying the eyes, a pattern for displaying the look-ahead chance eyes for the second and third times, etc.), and the look-ahead chance eyes may be displayed according to the pattern.

When the look-ahead chance eye flag is off in step 048AKS011 (step 048AKS011; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined display determination process (step 048AKS015). In the feature unit 048AK, as a predetermined display, a combination of some decorative symbols among the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different ratio according to the set set value, thereby giving suggestions regarding the set value. Perform setting suggestion effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23, the setting suggestion effect is performed by displaying the definite decorative symbols of the non-reach combinations of types A to C at different ratios according to the set values. In addition, the feature unit 048AK performs the predetermined display in the probability change state after the end of the big hit game state.

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing an example of a predetermined display determination process performed in step 048AKS015 of FIG. 8-20. In the predetermined display determination process shown in FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the probability variation control is in progress (step 048AKS041). Whether or not the probability change control is in progress may be determined, for example, by reading the EXT data in the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11. If the probability change control is not in progress (step 048AKS041; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, when the probability variation control is in progress (step 048AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the previous flag is on (step 048AKS042). The previous flag is a flag indicating whether or not the predetermined display is displayed in the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation (previous fluctuation) for which the predetermined display is displayed, and is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is provided.

When the previous flag is on, that is, when the predetermined display is displayed in the previous variation (step 048AKS042; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, when the previous flag is off (step 048AKS042; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the predetermined display is displayed, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion effect for displaying the predetermined display is executed according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-22. It is determined (step 048AKS043), and the predetermined display determination process is terminated. As described above, in the feature unit 048AK, when the predetermined display is displayed in the previous fluctuation, the predetermined display is not displayed, thereby preventing the predetermined display from being continuously displayed. On the other hand, the look-ahead chance eye, which is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation, is displayed continuously with a plurality of fluctuations as described above. It makes it easier for the player to recognize whether it is a suggestive effect, and prevents the player from being confused with the look-ahead chance by displaying the predetermined display continuously. In this example, an example of determining whether or not the predetermined display was displayed in the previous fluctuation is shown. For example, the number of consecutive times is counted, and if the number of consecutive times is 2, the predetermined display can be displayed. If it is three times, it may be restricted not to display the predetermined display. Further, the number of times that the predetermined display is continuously displayed may differ depending on the set value that has been set. According to this, the variation of the production is increased and the game entertainment can be improved. Hereinafter, executing the setting suggestion effect by displaying the predetermined display is simply referred to as executing the predetermined display.

FIG. 8-25 is a diagram showing a determination ratio for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined display. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK, whether or not the player is in the so-called consecutive villa state (whether or not the consecutive villa flag described later is on), that is, whether or not it is the first big hit. Depending on the situation, the ratio of determining that the predetermined display is executed is different. In the illustrated example, the determination ratio is set so that the predetermined display is not executed when the villa is in a row. According to this, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily guessed by executing the predetermined display in the so-called consecutive villa state, and to attract the attention of the player after the end of the first big hit. It should be noted that the predetermined display may be executed at a small rate such as 2% even during the consecutive villas.

After returning to FIG. 8-20 and executing the process of step 048AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the predetermined display, that is, whether or not the predetermined display is present (step 048AKS016). When there is a predetermined display (step 048AKS016; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the predetermined display to be executed according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-23 (step 048AKS017).

FIG. 8-23 is a diagram showing a determination ratio for determining the type of predetermined display to be executed. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 048AK, predetermined displays of types A to C are prepared in advance, a combination of "344" decorative symbols is derived and displayed in type A, and "399" decorative symbols are displayed in type B. The combination of the above is derived and displayed, and in the type C, the combination of the decorative symbols of "577" is derived and displayed. Then, it is suggested that the higher settings are made in the order of type A <type B <type C. In this example, an example suggesting which setting value is used is shown. For example, the setting value has been changed, the setting value is odd or even, and the minimum setting of "1" is set. If it is a suggestion about a set value, such as not being a value, the suggestion may be different. Further, there may be a predetermined display of a type that is displayed only when the set value is set high. The high setting may be the setting value of the upper half such as 4 to 6 out of 1 to 6, or the upper two such as 5 and 6. The setting value 6, which is the highest setting value, is referred to as the highest setting value.

After returning to FIG. 8-20 and executing the process of step 048AKS017, the effect control CPU 120 determines a predetermined display (combination of determined decorative symbols) of the type determined in step 048AKS017 as the final stop symbol (step). 048AKS018). Subsequently, the previous flag is set to the ON state (step 048AKS019), the count value provided according to the predetermined display type is added by 1 (step 048AKS020), and then the non-reach loss stop symbol determination process is terminated. The count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is the count value provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the predetermined display of the types A to C is displayed during the probable change state (only when the state is not the continuous villa state). It is for counting the number of times displayed. In step 048AKS020, the count value corresponding to the predetermined display of the type determined as the final stop symbol is added by 1. The count value is referred to in the final variation effect setting process (see FIG. 8-24) described later, displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f), and then cleared.

When it is determined in step 048AKS016 of FIG. 8-20 that there is no predetermined display (step 048AKS016; No), the effect control CPU 120 is not a combination of the predetermined display and the decorative symbol that serves as a look-ahead chance (other than the predetermined display, etc.). The reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS021). As an example, in the process of step 048AKS021, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left-determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left-determined value stored in advance in a ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the left confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. The right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Even if the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined display and the look-ahead chance eye (predetermined display, etc.) are not selected from each confirmed symbol determination table so as not to be a combination of the predetermined display and the decorative symbol that becomes the look-ahead chance eye in advance. Alternatively, when the combination of decorative symbols is decided, if the combination of the decorative symbols matches the predetermined display or the like, the lottery may be performed again. Further, in the process of step 048AKS021, for example, in the case of not in the probabilistic state, the combination of decorative symbols same as the predetermined display may be displayed at a lower rate than in the case of the special state, regardless of the set value. It may be there.

After executing the process of step 048AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the process of determining the non-reach loss stop symbol, etc. after clearing the flag to the off state last time (step 048AKS022). In this way, when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, the look-ahead chance eye is executed with priority over the predetermined display. The look-ahead chance is executed regardless of whether or not it is in the probabilistic state, whereas the predetermined display is being controlled to the probabilistic state and is executed only after the end of the first jackpot game state (that is,). It is not executed in the state of consecutive villas). Further, while the look-ahead chance eyes are continuously displayed with a plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined display is not continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player in the probabilistic state, make it easier for the player to recognize whether it is the pre-reading chance eye or the predetermined display, and improve the interest. Even when the look-ahead chance is displayed, the predetermined display may be prioritized in the case of the probability change state. In this case, if the final stop symbol after the predetermined display is displayed is set as the look-ahead chance, the player may be confused. Therefore, if the predetermined display is prioritized, the look-ahead chance is set for a predetermined period. You may limit the execution of the eyes. Specifically, the execution of the look-ahead chance may be restricted until the predetermined display is displayed five times. Further, the execution of the look-ahead chance eye may be restricted from the time when the predetermined display is displayed five times until the three times of fluctuations are completed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the look-ahead chance eyes continuously on the display of the predetermined display. In addition, the consecutive villa state is once controlled to the big hit game state, and then becomes the consecutive villa state by becoming a big hit again during the probability change state after the end (the consecutive villa flag is set to the on state). In addition, after the villa state is reached, the probabilistic change control is performed a predetermined number of times without a big hit again, and the process ends (the villa flag is cleared to the off state).

Returning to FIG. 8-19, when it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S522; No). Step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left / right confirmation symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left / right determination stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is performed. By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., among the finalized decorative symbols, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern of. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 and referring to a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S521; No), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" (big hit C or big hit F). There is), or it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" or a case other than these (step S525). When it is determined to be "sudden" or "small hit" (step S525; Yes), a definite decoration that becomes the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "sudden" or "small hit" such as the opening chance eye. The combination of symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, in response to the case where any of the fluctuation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, it is confirmed that the final stop symbol constituting one of the plurality of types of open chance eyes is used. Determine the combination of decorative patterns. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the chance eye to be updated by the random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and the predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Therefore, the combination of the definite decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes may be determined.

After executing any of the processes of step 048AKS010, step S524, and step S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final variation is in the probabilistic state (step 048AKS031). In step 048AKS031, for example, when the probability variation control is performed in 100 fluctuations after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is controlled to the probability variation state and it is determined whether or not it is the 100th variation. In the case of final variation (step 048AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the final variation effect setting process (step 048AKS032).

FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the final variation effect setting process performed in step 048AKS032 of FIG. 8-19. The final variation effect setting process is a process performed when the probability variation state ends without becoming a big hit. In the final variation effect setting process, the frequency of the displayed predetermined display is set to be visually displayed to the player for each type, or the number of balls acquired during the consecutive villa is set to be visually displayed to the player. Will be In the final variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 8-24, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the consecutive villa flag is set to the ON state, that is, whether or not the consecutive villa is in the villa (step 048AKS051).

When the villa is not in the villa, that is, when the villa flag is off (step 048AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 is set to display the respective count values provided according to the predetermined display type (for each type). (Count value display setting of) is performed (step 048AKS052). In step 048AKS052, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f), a setting is made to display the appearance frequencies of types A to C by a bar graph. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 clears each value of the count values provided according to the type of the predetermined display to 0, and if the previous flag is on, clears it to the off state, and sets the acquired ball output count value to 0. After clearing (step 048AKS053), the final variation effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 048AKS051 that the villa is in the villa, that is, when the villa flag is on (step 048AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of balls acquired during the villa. (Step 048AKS054). In addition, the number of balls (acquired balls) acquired during the consecutive villas starts counting because it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the consecutive villas are not performed, it is cleared by the above step 048AKS053, and the consecutive villas are cleared. If so, it is cleared in step 048AKS056 described later. That is, it suffices that the balls acquired in the jackpot game state are continuously counted during the period from when the consecutive villa flag is turned on to when it is turned off.

After executing the process of step 048AKS054, the effect control CPU 120 clears the consecutive villa flag to the off state (step 048AKS055), and shifts to the process of step 048AKS053 described above.

Returning to FIG. 8-19, when it is determined in step S525 that the value is other than "probability" or "small hit" (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot E) (step S525; No), A combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination is determined (step S526). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol updated by a random counter of RAM 122 or the like is extracted, and then a predetermined jackpot confirmed symbol stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the determination table or the like, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the screen of the image display device 5 are the same. Determine the decorative pattern. At this time, it may be determined that a different decorative symbol is set as the final decorative symbol depending on which of the jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, and jackpot E is the jackpot type.

After executing either the process of step S526 or the process of step 048AKS032, or when it is determined in step 048AKS031 that the final fluctuation is not in the probabilistic state (step 048AKS031; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets other effect execution settings. (Step S530). For example, an effect such that a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a predetermined timing at the start or during execution of the variable display, or a game effect. Immediately announce (deterministically) that the variable display result will be a "big hit" by executing the effect of a predetermined mode including a part or all of the effect of the mode in which the flash lamp included in the lamp 9 or the like shines. The effect of the one-shot notification mode may be executed. Alternatively, as a notice effect during fluctuation, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit" may be executed.

As another example, in the process of step S530, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit", for example, a setting for executing a predetermined mode of effect for liveliness may be made. More specifically, it suffices to be able to perform a predetermined mode of effect, such as an effect in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 illuminates, or an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image as a mini character.

After that, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S531). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects, for example, one of a plurality of prepared special figure variation effect control patterns in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, and sets the pattern to be used. After executing the process of step S531, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command (step S532). Subsequently, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the decorative pattern and the like in the image display device 5 is made (step S533). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the pattern to be used in step S532 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 8-25 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a predetermined display or a count value display for each type is performed. In the illustrated example, a predetermined display of type A is executed, not in the consecutive villas. Further, it is a probability change state, and the probability change control is performed until the fluctuation is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game state. Fluctuations are initiated as shown in FIG. 8-25 (a). It should be noted that FIG. 8-25 (a) is assumed to be the 99th change after the end of the big hit game state. When it is determined to execute the predetermined display in the variation and the type is type A, the combination of decorative symbols of "344" as shown in FIG. 8-25 (b) (determined in step 048AKS018 of FIG. 8-20). The combination of the decorative patterns) is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (c), the 100th variation, that is, the final variation in the probability variation state is started, and as shown in FIG. 8-25 (c), the lost symbol (step 048AKS021 in FIG. 8-20). The combination of decorative patterns determined in the above) is derived and displayed. As a result, the probability change state ends. At the end of the probabilistic state, after the end of the final variation, a message indicating that effect (a message indicating the end of the ST mode, which is the probabilistic state) is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25 (e). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f), the count value for each type set in the process of step 048AKS052 in FIG. 8-24 is displayed (graph is displayed for each type), which is a normal state. It will shift to the mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Regardless of the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), it corresponds to each set value from 1238. The range up to the value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

In particular, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, there are a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value. It is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times as compared with the case where the random value is provided. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the above-mentioned hit determination value is obtained regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. Since 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. Is whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the probability variation state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value is determined according to whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the second special figure display result is different. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself uses 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). It is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the number is within, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. When determining whether or not the random value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value, it is controlled to the small hit gaming state. When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. Therefore, the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state.

Further, the RAM 102 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment is stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). While reading the set value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value corresponding to the read set value are set (the display result judgment table according to the set value is set), and the jackpot game state is set. It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value. Therefore, the improper set value is read and the improper variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the set value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and the display result determination table is set according to the read set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 may read a set value from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and set a display result determination table according to the read set value. .. When setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. All variable display results may be judged using the display result judgment table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and reads the read set value and the previous variable display result. A setting value read from the RAM 102 (judgment used setting value) is compared for judgment, and if the setting value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the judgment used setting value as the comparison result, an image is displayed. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to reading out an inappropriate set value. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the game machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can quickly deal with the abnormal set value.

In the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value are compared each time the variable display is executed is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be executed a predetermined number of times of variable display or may be executed based on the elapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time does not match the determined used set value as the comparison result, the effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent the determination of an inappropriate variable display result from being performed by reading.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 to 8-16, the CPU 103 is variable by using a variable display result determination module that is common when executing the random number value determination at the time of winning and when executing the special symbol normal processing. Since the display result is determined, a part of the processing can be shared between when the random value determination at the time of winning is executed and when the special symbol normal processing is executed, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, a small hit is made regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the numerical range of the determination value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (to the set value read from the RAM 102). Since the display result determination table is set according to the situation), the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state can be reduced. Further, as in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the RAM 102 When setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the set value read from, the process for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM 102 is standardized. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, when 1 (the set value having the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set. Is not set, so if 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it should be determined whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the feature part 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, the embodiment in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, a mode in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, the combination of some decorative symbols among the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different ratio according to the set set value as a predetermined display while the probability change state is controlled. To do. In addition to the predetermined display, the look-ahead chance eye composed of the fixed decorative symbols of the non-reach combination is also displayed as the variable display result, so that the variation of the production can be increased and the game interest can be improved. Further, the look-ahead chance eyes may also be displayed at different ratios according to the set value. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because it is suggested which set value is set by the variable display result during the control to the probabilistic state.

Further, the probability change state is caused by the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big hit game state, or the jackpot game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. finish. That is, if the jackpot game state is not reached again, the probability change state continues until at least a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Therefore, even if the hobby is controlled to the probabilistic state and the normal state is reached without being controlled to the big hit game state again, it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed by displaying the predetermined display.

Further, the feature unit 048AK displays different types of predetermined displays at different ratios according to the set set values for the predetermined displays of types A to C. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which type of predetermined display is displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination constituting the look-ahead chance eye is a combination of symbols different from the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination constituting the predetermined display. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the look-ahead effect and the setting suggestion effect, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being confused with the notice effect of the jackpot expectation. Further, while the look-ahead chance eye can be continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined display is restricted so as not to be continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined display from being confused with the look-ahead notice exercise by being displayed continuously.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK, after being controlled to the probabilistic state, at the timing controlled to the normal state, the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is displayed, so that the frequency of the predetermined display can be determined. Make it recognizable to others. According to this, the player can confirm the frequency at which the predetermined result is displayed, and it is possible to easily predict the set value. In addition, the count value displayed according to the type of the predetermined display is displayed when the consecutive villa flag is off, that is, at the timing when the normal state is reached without becoming a big hit again after being once controlled to the probability change state. Only done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily guessed by displaying the count value at the time of consecutive villas. On the other hand, in the case of a consecutive villa, instead of displaying the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display, the number of balls acquired during the consecutive villa is displayed at the timing when the normal state is reached. .. According to this, the winning balls in the consecutive villas are displayed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Modification example of feature part 048AK)
As shown in FIGS. 8-8 to 8-11, the feature unit 048AK sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) to the large hit determination value regardless of the gaming state and the set value. Although it is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, as shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) and 8-26 (B), the game Regardless of the state or the set value, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value may be continuously provided.

In addition, when the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is increased. By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is 1024 to 1237. Is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is a reference value for the small hit determination value) so that the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

When the game state is the probabilistic state, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the set value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit judgment is made. The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increases from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Set to (reference value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment value is set. The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set in the same manner.

Further, as a mode for setting the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) to be continuous in this way, as shown in FIG. 8-27, The numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Further, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is changed according to the set value. Therefore, the jackpot probability may be different according to the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. 8-27, when determining the variable display result, the CPU 103 first determines the value of the random number value MR1. Is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 8-27, the setting value 1 is 64990, the setting value 2 is 64974, and the setting value 3 is 64954). When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the jackpot determination value, it is further variable by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than 65208, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It suffices to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By determining the variable display in this way, the variable display result is determined without executing both the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit and the determination of whether or not the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the determination of the variable display result of the CPU 103.

As described above, in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value). Common numerical range of common numerical range and small hit judgment value, when 2 to 6 are set as set values for pachinko gaming machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value, non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value The common numerical range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020, which is the reference value of the big hit judgment value, and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the big hit judgment regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value, so that the large hit game state or the small hit game state It is possible to determine whether or not to control. Further, when it is determined that the control is performed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the big hit game is determined by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value in the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small hit game state, the processing load for determining whether the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the determination whether to control the small hit game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load of performing the above.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, when the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from the jackpot reference value of 1020, and the increased jackpot determination value. Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range of, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the big hit gaming state within the numerical range in which the number of the large hit determination values has increased, and the small hit gaming state. Since it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Further, also in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 only needs to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the jackpot gaming state is reduced. can do.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 8-26 and 8-27, a mode in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value has been illustrated. The numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the large hit determination value.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the figure As shown in 8-28 and FIG. 8-29, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical ranges.

When the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value ( The non-common numerical range (judgment included in the non-common numerical range) when the small hit judgment value common numerical range) is a numerical range different from the big hit judgment value common numerical range and the big hit judgment value setting value is 6. In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the largest number of values), a continuous numerical range from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 8-28, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 8-29, in any case. The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the reference value of the small hit determination value is common according to the fluctuation special chart, but the determination value included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although the forms in which the numbers are different are illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special chart. May be the same as.

As described above, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. There is. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, a numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value). In the range, the range corresponding to the set value with 60,000 as the reference value (60,000 to 60016 for the set value 2, 60000 to 60035 for the set value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for the set value 6) is a big hit. It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to the change of the set value. Therefore, the development of the pachinko gaming machine related to the set value. The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and whether or not the small hit game state is controlled.

In particular, since the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value to the jackpot gaming state with the same value of 60000 as the reference value regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 can determine the jackpot. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, as in the case of the feature portion 048AK described above, when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set. Is not set, the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only for the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

Further, in the forms shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is the common numerical range of the large hit determination value regardless of the set value. In a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) and is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of set values regardless of the set value, the CPU 103 has the same value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit gaming state with 32767 as the small hit reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state of the CPU 103.

In the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, while the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value for the machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when 2 or more is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it corresponds to each set value. Although the embodiment in which the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value is not set. A common numerical range may be set. Even when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the reference is the same as in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29. The range from 1238, which is a value, to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as a non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the modes shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the fluctuation special chart, the fluctuation special chart is the first in the CPU 103. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state using 32767, which is the same value in the case of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure, as a reference value, it is possible to control the small hit game state by the CPU 103. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to use it.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, the form in which the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the minimum value of the non-common numerical range is illustrated, but the present invention has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the feature unit 048AK of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value or is not common. Whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state is determined based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although a mode for determining whether or not to control the small hit game state is illustrated based on the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is in the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the feature unit 048AK. It may be determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the small hit game state. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number value MR1 and it may be determined whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the value of the calculation result. Further, an operation is performed on the value of the random number value MR1, and a big hit game state or a small hit game is performed based on whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535 which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). It may be determined whether or not to control the state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the probability variation control is always performed after the end of the big hit game state, and the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (100 times) is finished, or the next big hit game state is started. , An example of continuing until any one of the end conditions is satisfied first, but for example, the probability variation control may be continued until the next big hit game state is started (predetermined number of times (100 times). ) The end of the special figure game does not have to be the end condition of the probability variation control). In such a case, a jackpot type (non-probability change jackpot type) that is not controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state is prepared, and the predetermined special figure game ends after the end of the non-probability change jackpot game state. The associative state may end at the timing when the time saving control controlled up to is completed. In such a game machine, it is possible to display a predetermined display even during control in a time saving state as well as in a probability changing state.

Further, in such a game machine, although the probabilistic state continues until the next big hit game state is started, it may take a long time until the variable display result becomes a big hit (in the so-called consecutive villa). Hamari state). Therefore, for example, when the number of game balls that have won the variable winning ball device 6B exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined that the player has entered the hamari state in the consecutive villa, and the setting suggestion effect is performed according to the set value. May be good. In addition, a launch sensor may be provided to determine that the player has entered the hamari state in the consecutive villa because the number of launches of the game balls exceeds a predetermined number, and a setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the set value. Furthermore, an out sensor is provided at the out port where the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in, and it is determined that the number of out balls exceeds a predetermined number and the player has entered the state of being in a row. , The setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the set value. According to this, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the so-called villa state, and to promote the launch. In the setting suggestion effect, for example, the sound may be output, a specific character may be displayed, or both may be performed according to the set setting value.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the message indicating the end of the ST mode in the probabilistic state is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25 (e), the predetermined display is displayed as it is as shown in FIG. 8-25 (f). An example is shown in which the count values provided according to the types of are displayed in a graph for each type, but this is an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (e), after a message indicating the end of the ST mode in the probabilistic state is displayed, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B (for example, a message such as pressing a button is displayed). , A button image, etc.), and based on the push sensor 35B detecting the movement of the player with respect to the push button 31B, the count value provided according to the predetermined display type may be displayed. Good. According to this, the production can be executed according to the preference of the player. If the movement by the player is not detected, it is not necessary to display the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display.

(Explanation of feature part 063AK)
Next, the feature portion 063AK of the present embodiment will be described. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK, once a big hit is made, 100% probability variation control is performed after the end of the big hit game state, as in the feature unit 048AK. It shall be. That is, it is assumed that the big hit types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" shown in FIG. 8-12 are prepared as the big hit types as in the feature unit 063AK. In the pachinko gaming machine in the feature unit 063AK, only the time saving control is executed in either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure after the end of the big hit game state, and the state shifts to the low accuracy and high base state. A jackpot type of jackpot G (also referred to as non-probability variation jackpot) or a jackpot type of jackpot H in which probability variation control continues (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) until the next jackpot may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither high accuracy control nor time saving control is executed after the jackpot game is completed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed in the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state. Then, in the setting suggestion effect performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK, the execution mode of the mode 1 in which the ratio of selection is high when the setting value is set to be advantageous to the player and the execution mode of the player are high. There is an execution mode of the second aspect in which the ratio of selection is high when the setting value is set to an unfavorable value, and the execution mode of the first aspect has a longer execution period of the setting suggestion effect than the execution mode of the second aspect. It has the characteristic of being.

Such a feature is due to the following background. In general, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a moving image of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on member registration-based websites such as Networking Services, and Internet video sharing sites. However, if the execution period of the advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, with regard to the production (disadvantageous production) that is often performed in a disadvantageous case, there is no desire to shoot, so if the execution period of the disadvantageous production is long, the player will be uncomfortable. There is. Therefore, in the feature unit 063AK, the execution period for the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period for the unfavorable effect is shorter than that for the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. It has the characteristics of. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK having such features will be described. It should be noted that the description of the same parts as those described in the above basic explanation and the feature portion 048AK will be omitted.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S177 of FIG. 7 as the ending effect process. In the ending effect processing shown in FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect in-progress flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS001). The ending effect in progress flag is a flag indicating that the ending effect is being executed, and is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. The ending effect in-progress flag is set to the on state by the process of step 063AKS004 described later, and is cleared to the off state by the process of step 063AKS012.

When the ending effect in-progress flag is off (step 063AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (step 063AKS002). The ending command is, for example, a command transmitted from the main board 11 side in the process of step S117 of FIG. 5, and is a command indicating to start execution of the ending effect. If the ending command has not been received (step 063AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the ending effect process. The ending command includes an execution period of the ending effect. In the feature unit 063AK, as in the feature unit 048AK, the jackpot types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" shown in FIG. 8-12 are prepared, but the ending effect is executed regardless of the jackpot type. The period is common (eg 20 seconds).

On the other hand, when the ending command is received (step 063AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the ending effect start setting process for starting the effect operation to be the ending effect (step 063AKS003). After that, after setting the ending effect in-progress flag to the on state (step 063AKS004), the ending effect process ends.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect start setting process executed in step 063AKS003 of FIG. 9-1. In the ending effect start setting process shown in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-3 (step 063AKS021). In the example shown in FIG. 9-3, regardless of the set value, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is determined by the determined ratio shown in the figure, but the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You may do so. Specifically, when the set value is a high setting of 4 to 6, the execution rate may be higher than when the set value is a low setting of 1 to 3. On the contrary, the execution rate may be higher in the low setting than in the case of the high setting.

Returning to FIG. 9-2, after executing the process of step 063AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect, that is, whether or not there is execution (step 063AKS022). When there is execution (step 063AKS022; Yes), the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-4 (step 063AKS023). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, there are two types of execution modes, “Aspect 1” and “Aspect 2”, as execution modes of the setting suggestion effect, and “Aspect 1” is set as shown in FIG. 9-4. The higher the set value, the higher the rate of determination. On the other hand, in "Aspect 2", the lower the set value is set, the higher the rate of determination is. Here, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (higher ball output rate). Therefore, when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is performed, , It is suggested that the ball output rate is set to a high set value (advantageous set value) (advantageous suggestion is made). The setting suggestion effects of "Aspect 1" and "Aspect 2" in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment are both effects of displaying characters, but different characters are displayed in "Aspect 1" and "Aspect 2". Display (Aspect 1 is a character of character A, aspect 2 is a character of character B, etc.). The setting suggestion effect is not limited to the effect of displaying the character, and may be arbitrary as long as it is different between "Aspect 1" and "Aspect 2", such as an effect of displaying a message, a battle effect, and a dialogue effect. By determining the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect in step 063AKS023, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is also determined. In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is longer in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" than in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2". There is. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, and it is possible to secure the shooting time. In addition, since the shooting time can be secured, the shot images and videos will be published by the player on the Internet. In many cases, the images taken by which pachinko machine 1 in which game field are also included. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the game hall, the player advertises the game hall. Therefore, by securing the shooting time when the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the playground side.

In addition, although the example shown in FIG. 9-4 shows that there are two types of execution modes, in addition to this, for example, when the set value is a low setting of 1 to 3, it is not executed and the set value is 4. There may be an execution mode of "Aspect 3" that is executed only when the setting is high of ~ 6. Further, there may be an execution mode of "Aspect 4" that is executed only when the set value of 6 is the highest set value. In this case, when the set value of 6 is set. It is sufficient that the determination ratio of the "aspect 4" is lower than the ratio of the setting suggestion effect other than the "aspect 4" being executed. According to this, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 4" is increased, the player is given a recognition that the set value is not 6 when the setting suggestion effect other than "Aspect 4" is executed. It is possible to prevent the game from being stolen, and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed. Further, there may be a mode in which the setting value is an even number or a mode in which the setting value is an odd number.

Returning to FIG. 9-2, after executing the process of step 063AKS023, the effect control CPU 120 sets the preparatory effect for setting the execution of the preparatory effect (step 063AKS024). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending effect, a predetermined period (see FIG. 9-8) regardless of whether the execution mode is “aspect 1” or “aspect 2”. During the period of T1 shown), an effect of urging the player to prepare for shooting is executed as a preparatory effect. In addition to prompting the player to prepare the camera as a preparation for shooting, the preparatory effect is also an effect that suggests the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect to the player (see FIG. 9-9).

After executing the process of step 063AKS024 of FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the mode determined in step 063AKS023 is "mode 1" (step 063AKS025). In the case of "Aspect 1" (step 063AKS063; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets a special effect for setting the execution of the special effect (step 063AKS026). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed, a special effect that is not executed by the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2" is further executed. That is, the special effect is an effect performed during the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D), the special effect in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment displays an effect image around the character displayed as the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". It is a production. Not limited to this, for example, a special sound may be output. In this case, the special sound to be output may be the same sound as the sound output when the jackpot game state is controlled. According to this, it is suggested that it is advantageous, and the player can easily grasp the advantage.

After executing the process of step 063AKS026 in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 sets the extended operation display for setting the execution of the display effect operation display (step 063AKS027). In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed, the player performs the operation, so that the ending effect is finished (after the jackpot game state is finished). It is possible to recognize that the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" has been performed (extended display is possible). Therefore, in step 063AKS027, a display prompting an operation for making it visible that the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" has been performed even after the end of the ending effect is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (E), a display prompting an operation (extension operation) for the push button 31B is set. When the extension operation is performed, the feature unit 063AK displays the character image displayed as the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as the background image for a period until the variable display is performed 15 times (FIG. FIG. See 9-9 (I)). According to this, it is possible to take a picture again for the player who could not take the image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 during the ending effect, and also for the other players. It is possible to appeal that the setting suggestion effect of 1 has been executed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS027 in FIG. 9-2, when it is determined in step 063AKS025 that it is "Aspect 2" (step 063AKS025; No), or when it is determined that it is not executed in step 063AKS022 (step 063AKS022: No), the effect control CPU 120 is set to perform the return prevention notification and the warning display (step 063AKS028). As the return prevention notification set in step 063AKS028, a prepaid card or the like as a game recording medium in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can specify the magnitude of the game value of the game ball or the like that can be used for the game. There is a return prevention display as a display to prevent forgetting to remove the card. In the return prevention display, for example, an image showing the ejection of the card is displayed with the characters "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card." It should be noted that, instead of a card, a coin or the like as a game recording medium in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can specify the magnitude of the game value such as a game ball that can be used for the game is targeted. You may perform an alert. The prepaid card or the like as the recording medium for the game is for enabling the game to be executed by inserting the card or the like. In addition, as a warning display, there is a immersive prevention display as a display for preventing the player from being too enthusiastic about the game of the pachinko game machine 1 or the slot machine. In the immersive prevention display, for example, the characters "Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately. Be careful of immersiveness." And the image that surrounds the characters are displayed. The immersive prevention display as such a warning display suppresses or warns the player from being absorbed in the game, and suppresses or warns the player from spending a large amount of money on the game. In addition, as a warning display, a warning display prohibiting games under the age of 18 saying "Games under the age of 18 are prohibited by law" and a fraudulent act "Cheating is a crime." A warning display, a warning display for suppressing fraudulent acts such as "Please be careful about fraud disguised as a strategy", etc. may be displayed by characters and images. The other warning indications may be other than those shown above. For example, when a movable accessory is provided on the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the movement of the movable accessory may be displayed. Therefore, care may be taken not to get injured.

In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is longer in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" than in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2". There is. In addition, the execution period of the ending effect is the same regardless of the jackpot type. Therefore, in step 063AKS028, the execution period of the return prevention notification and the warning display is longer when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 2" is executed than when the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" is executed. (T3 <T6 in FIG. 9-8), and the start timing of the next mode notification described later is set to the same timing.

After executing the process of step 063AKS028 in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next mode notification to notify the game state after the end of the big hit as the next mode notification (step 063AKS029), and the ending effect Start Ends the setting process. In the process of step 063AKS029, the period for performing the next mode notification is also set. In step 063AKS029, the period of T4 shown in FIG. 9-8 is set as the next mode notification period. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the period of T7 may also be set as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C).

Returning to FIG. 9-1, when it is determined that the ending effect in-progress flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed (step). 063AKS005). When it is determined that the ending effect time has elapsed, that is, when the execution period of the ending effect has ended (step 063AKS005; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the ending effect in progress flag to the off state (step 063AKS012). Then, as the probability variation fluctuation number, the number of variable displays controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game state is set (step 063AKS013). In step 063AKS013, for example, 100 is set. Note that the process of step 063AKS013 may not be executed, and a command corresponding to the number of probable variation fluctuations may be received from the main board 11 side. After executing the process of step 063AKS013, the effect control CPU 120 clears the effect process flag, initializes the value to "0" (step 063AKS014), and then ends the ending effect process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 063AKS005 that the ending effect time has not elapsed (step 063AKS005; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, that is, whether or not there is a setting suggestion effect. Determine (step 063AKS006). When there is a setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect operation control process when there is a setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS007), and shifts to the process of step 063AKS008. On the other hand, when there is no setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; No), the process proceeds to step 063AKS008 without executing the process of step 063AKS007.

FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect operation control process with the setting suggestion effect performed in step 063AKS007 of FIG. 9-1. In the ending effect operation control process with the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 9-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the preparatory effect period (step 063AKS031). The preparation effect period is set by the process of step 063AKS024 in FIG. 9-2. In the case of the preparatory effect period (step 063AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the preparatory effect operation control for executing the preparatory effect (step 063AKS032).

After executing the process of step 063AKS032, or when it is not the preparation effect period (step 063AKS031; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 063AKS033). The setting suggestion effect period is set according to the mode in accordance with the execution mode determined in step 063AKS023 of FIG. 9-2. If it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 063AKS033; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the ending effect operation control process when there is a setting suggestion effect.

In the case of the setting suggestion effect period (step 063AKS033; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting suggestion effect operation control for executing the setting suggestion effect of the mode determined in step 063AKS023 of FIG. 9-2 (step). 063AKS034). It is determined whether or not the mode of the setting suggestion effect subsequently executed is "Aspect 1" (step 063AKS035), and if it is "Aspect 1" (Step 063AKS035; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a special effect period. Determine (step 063AKS036). The special effect period may be set in step 063AKS026 of FIG. 9-2. The special effect period in the feature unit 063AK in this embodiment is the same period as the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". Therefore, if the special effect period is in the same period as the setting suggestion effect period, the process of step 063AKS030 is unnecessary. On the other hand, the special effect period may be shorter than the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1". In this case, it may be determined by the process of step 063AKS030 whether or not it is the special effect period.

If it is the special effect period (step 063AKS036; Yes), the special effect operation control for executing the special effect is performed (step 063AKS037). After executing the process of step 063AKS037, or when it is not the special effect period (step 063AKS036; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the extended operation display period (step 063AKS038). The extended operation display period is set in step 063AKS027 of FIG. 9-2. If it is the extended operation display period (step 063AKS038; Yes), the extended operation display control for performing the extended operation display is performed (step 063AKS038A). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B (step 063AKS039), and if it is detected (step 063AKS039; Yes), the extension flag is set to the on state. After that (step 063AKS040), the ending effect operation control process is terminated when there is a setting suggestion effect. The extension flag is a flag indicating that the extension operation has been performed by the player, and is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

When it is determined in step 063AKS035 that the execution mode is "Aspect 2" (step 036AKS035; No), when it is determined in step 063AKS038 that it is not the extended operation display period (step 063AKS030; No), or in step 063AKS039. If no operation is detected (step 063AKS039; No), the ending effect operation control process with the setting suggestion effect ends.

Returning to FIG. 9-1, after executing the process of step 063AKS00, or when it is determined in step 063AKS006 that there is no setting suggestion effect (step 063AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 is in the return prevention notification and alert period. It is determined whether or not there is (step 063AKS008). The return prevention notification and alert period are set in step 063AKS028 of FIG. 9-2. In addition, in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the return prevention notification and the warning are given regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect is performed or not performed in the ending effect. The same applies to the next mode notification.

When it is determined in step 063AKS008 of FIG. 9-1 that it is the return prevention notification and alert period (step 063AKS008; Yes), the return prevention notification and alert control are performed to execute the return prevention notification and alert (step 063AKS008; Yes). Step 063AKS009). After the processing of step 063AKS009, or when it is determined in step 063AKS008 that it is not the return prevention notification and attention alert period (step 063AKS008; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the next mode notification period. (Step 063AKS010). The next mode notification period is set in step 063AKS029 shown in FIG. 9-2. In the case of the next mode notification period (step 063AKS010; Yes), the ending effect processing ends after the next mode notification control for performing the next mode notification is performed (step 063AKS011). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the next mode notification period (step 063AKS010; No), the ending effect processing is terminated as it is. In the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, as described above, once a big hit occurs, 100% probability variation control is performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. For example, the probability variation jackpot is shown. Only when it becomes, it is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, and when it becomes a non-probable big hit, it is controlled to the time saving state instead of the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state. In the mode notification, the notification corresponding to each of the probability change and the time reduction may be performed.

FIG. 9-6 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the variable display start setting process performed in the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. 7. In the process in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-6, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the extension flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS041). When the extension flag is on (step 063AKS041; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 uses the character displayed in the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as a special background as a background image (special background) for 15 fluctuations. 15 variable special background setting is performed (step 063AKS042). Specifically, in the process of step 063AKS042, the value of the special background counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is set to "1" (the initial value is "0"), and the special background is displayed in the variable display. Do. As a result, the special background is displayed from the variable display.

After executing the process of step 063AKS042, the effect control CPU 120 clears the extension flag (step 063AKS043). Then, the remaining number of times display setting for displaying the remaining number of times of variable display in which the special background is displayed is set (step 063AKS044). Specifically, in the feature unit 063AK of this embodiment, the character displayed in the setting suggestion effect of "Aspect 1" as a special background from the end of the jackpot game state to the end of the variable display 15 times. Is displayed as a background image. Therefore, in step 063AKS044, 15 scales are displayed, and the player can visually display that the special background is displayed until the remaining 15 variable displays are completed. It should be noted that the display may not be a scale display but may be a numerical countdown display. Further, in this example, the remaining number display is updated (reducing the scale) at the end timing of the variable display (the remaining number display is updated by the special figure hit waiting process described later), but the variable display is displayed. The remaining number display may be updated at the same time as the start, and in that case, the remaining number display may be updated by the process in the variable display start setting process.

After executing the process of step 063AKS044, the effect control CPU 120 sets the special background display flag indicating that the special background is being displayed to the ON state (step 063AKS045), and processes in the variable display start setting process. To finish. The special background display flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 063AKS041 that the extension flag is in the off state (step 063AKS041; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special background display flag is set to the on state (step). 063AKS046). If the special background display flag is on (step 063AKS046; Yes), the value of the special background counter is added by 1 (step 063AKS047), and then the process in the variable display start setting process ends. On the other hand, if the special background display flag is off (step 063AKS046; No), the variable display is started after the normal background display setting for displaying the normal background instead of the special background is made (step 063AKS048). End the process in the setting process. After the normal background display setting is once performed, the processing in the variable display start setting processing may not be performed until the jackpot game state is controlled again.

FIG. 9-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing in the special figure hit waiting process performed in the special figure hit waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. 7. In the process in the waiting process for hitting the special figure, a process of determining whether or not the variable display has been performed 15 times and a process of updating the remaining number of times display are mainly performed. In the process in the special figure hit waiting process shown in FIG. 9-6, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special background display in-progress flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS051). When the special background display in-progress flag is in the off state (step 063AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process in the special figure hit wait process as it is.

On the other hand, when the special background display in-flag is on (step 063AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 updates the remaining number of times display (step 063AKS052). Specifically, in step 063AKS052, the remaining number of times display is updated by turning on the scale corresponding to the remaining number of times out of the 15 scale displays and turning off the finished variable display. That is, if it is the first variable display after the end of the big hit, the control is performed to turn off the 15th scale display (the remaining 14 scales are turned on). After executing the process of step 063AKS052, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the special background counter is 15, that is, whether or not it is the final variable display for displaying the special background (step 063AKS053). .. If the value of the special background counter is not 15 (step 063AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process in the special figure hit wait process.

When the value of the special background counter is 15 (step 063AKS053; Yes), it is assumed that the final variable display for displaying the special background is completed, the special background display flag is cleared (step 063AKS054), and the value of the special background counter is set. Is cleared to 0 (step 063AKS055), and then the special figure hit waiting process is terminated. As a result, No is determined in step 063AKS046 of FIG. 9-6, and the normal background is displayed in step 063AKS048.

FIG. 9-8 is a time chart showing an execution period of the ending effect and the like. Specifically, FIG. 9-8 (A) is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed in the ending effect, and FIG. 9-8 (B) is a time chart of aspect 2 in the ending effect. It is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is executed, and FIG. 9-8 (C) is a time chart when the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the ending effect.

As described above, the execution period of the ending effect is the same regardless of the jackpot type. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the execution period of the ending effect is a common period regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect is executed or not.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the jackpot symbol is stopped and the round game is performed regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect is executed or not. Then, when the ending effect is started, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed and the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B). In addition to urging the player to prepare the camera as a preparation for shooting, a preparatory effect that suggests the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect to the player is executed during the period of T1. On the other hand, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the next mode notification is executed for the period of T7 as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C).

Subsequently, when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed, and when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed, the setting suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B). Execute. In the case of the first aspect, the period setting suggestion effect of T2 is executed, and the special effect is also executed accordingly. In addition, the extension operation display is performed during the period within the period of T2 in which the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), an extension operation display is performed from a predetermined period after the setting suggestion effect is executed to the timing at the end of the setting suggestion effect, but within the period of T2. If there is, it may be any period.

Further, in the case of the second aspect, the period setting suggestion effect of T5 is executed. Specifically, the character of aspect 2 is displayed. In the feature unit 063AK, T2> T5. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the end timing of the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) coincides with the end timing of the next mode notification shown in FIG. 9-8 (C). An example is shown, but these timings do not have to match.

Subsequently, when the setting suggestion effect is completed, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), the return prevention notification and the warning display are performed during the period of T3, and the setting suggestion effect is displayed. When the setting suggestion effect of is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), the return prevention notification and the warning display are performed during the period of T6. In the feature unit 063AK, T6> T3. As shown in the figure, in the feature unit 063AK, T2 + T3 = T5 + T6, that is, the difference (T2-T5) between the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 and the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is aspect 2. Each period matches the difference (T6-T3) between the period of the return prevention notification, etc. when the setting suggestion effect of is executed and the period of the return prevention notification, etc. when the setting suggestion effect of mode 1 is executed. It has been set. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (C), the return prevention notification and the warning display are executed for the same period as when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed. To do. If the setting suggestion effect is not executed, after the next mode notification is executed for the period of T7, the same notification (display) is performed for the same period as when the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed.

After the return prevention notification and the warning display are performed, in either case, the next mode notification is performed for the period of T4, and the ending effect is ended. After the end of the ending effect, that is, after the end of the big hit game state, the probability change state is controlled. However, if the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, the extension operation is performed, and the extension flag is on, FIG. As shown in -8 (A), the special background is displayed for 15 fluctuations. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, the relationship between the execution periods is T4 <T3 <T1 <T6 <T5 <T2 <T7, but the relationship is not limited to this, and T4 <T3 = T1 <T6. The relationship may be <T5 <T2 <T7, and as long as the relationship T1 <T5 <T2 is established, the other periods may be arbitrary. That is, in this example, the difference between T2 and T5 is adjusted by T3 and T6, but T4 may be included in the adjustment, and the period of T4 is set to the period of T4 instead of T3 and T6 in aspects 1 and 2. The difference between T2 and T5 may be adjusted depending on the difference between.

FIG. 9-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an ending effect or the like is executed. Specifically, an example of an effect operation when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed in the ending effect is shown. Further, in the illustrated example, an extension operation is performed and a special background is displayed after the end of the jackpot game state. First, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the jackpot symbol is stopped, a round game is subsequently performed. Then, with the start of the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), a camera image is displayed to prompt the player to prepare for shooting as a preparatory effect, and when is the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect? , A countdown display is performed as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (B) and 9-9 (C). In addition, this preparatory effect suggests to the player that the character should be paid attention to by displaying a message such as "Attention to the character after ○ seconds" instead of simply performing the countdown display. It is also a production. That is, the preparatory effect is also an effect that includes an explanation of the content of the setting suggestion effect. In the illustrated example, only the message "Attention to the character" is given, but the content of the setting suggestion effect may be explained in more detail, for example, whether the character A appears or not.

Then, when the preparatory effect is completed, the setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (D). Since it is the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, a special effect of displaying an effect that makes the surroundings of the displayed character A stand out is also executed. Further, as shown in the figure, the feature unit 063AK visually displays the display time of the character A of the character A corresponding to the aspect 1 to the player when the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 is executed. In the illustrated example, the display period is visible on the meter display, but a countdown display may be used. The control of the display time of the character may be executed in step 063AKS034 when executing the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1, or when executing the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 in step 063AKS007. In addition, a process for controlling the display period may be added separately.

Subsequently, in the extended operation display period, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (E), the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the extended operation display. In the feature unit 063AK, the extension operation display is performed in such a manner that it can be recognized that the extension is performed by performing the operation. Therefore, it is easy for the player to understand what happens when the operation is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Then, when the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected, the display is extended as shown in FIG. 9-9 (F) as the extension flag is turned on, that is, special after the end of the jackpot game state. Visible display that the background is displayed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-9 (F), another example of displaying a message such as "Special time has entered!", That is, an example of performing the next mode notification is shown, but this is an example, and the next time. Mode notification does not have to be performed. The next mode notification may be executed in other periods in addition to the execution period of T4 shown in FIG. 9-8, and may be executed, for example, within the execution period of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-9 (F) shows an example in that case. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-9 (F), unlike FIGS. 9-9 (D) and 9-9 (E), the character of the character A is in a pose with a V sign. , The pose may be the same as in FIG. 9-9 (D) and FIG. 9-9 (E). For example, as shown in the figure, when the pose of the character changes with the passage of time, the pose character at the timing when the push button 31B is operated may be displayed as a special background after the jackpot game state ends. In the example shown in FIG. 9-9, the push button 31B is operated in the manner shown in FIG. 9-9 (F), and the character image of the pose is displayed as a special background. Apart from this, even if the pose of the character changes with the passage of time, the character image of the pose displayed at the start of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed as a special background regardless of the operation timing.

During the return prevention notification and warning display period, as shown in Fig. 9-9 (G), the return prevention notification includes the message "Please be careful not to forget to remove the card." To prevent forgetting to remove the card. Is displayed, and the message "Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately! Be careful of your immersiveness." Is displayed as a warning display. Then, in the next mode notification period, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (H), the message "Special time has entered!" Is displayed, and then the ending effect ends, so that the jackpot game state ends. In addition to the next mode notification, for example, the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be displayed. Further, in the illustrated example, a character image of the character A displayed as the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is displayed in accordance with the return prevention notification and the warning display. When the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed, the character image of the character B may be displayed together, and when the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the character image may not be displayed. In addition, unlike this, a common character image may be displayed in accordance with the return prevention notification and the warning display regardless of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed.

After the jackpot game state ends, it is controlled to the probability change state. Then, since the extension operation is performed by the player, the special background is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (I) until the variable display of 15 times is completed. Although the effect image as a special effect is not displayed and only the character image is displayed, the effect image may also be displayed. Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (I), 15 memory displays are performed as the remaining number display, and the memory display is turned off one by one each time the variable display ends. ing. In the illustrated example, an example of a state in which the third variable display is performed after the end of the big hit game state is shown.

In addition, in the feature unit 063AK in this embodiment, when the operation is performed by the player, the special background is displayed in the variable display of a predetermined time (15 times) after the end of the big hit game state, and corresponds to the mode 1. Although an example of extending the character display to be performed is shown, the special background may be displayed in the variable display of a predetermined time (15 times) regardless of the operation of the player. According to this, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, that is, the display suggesting that the ball output rate is set to a high set value (advantageous set value) is displayed for a long period of time. It is possible to appeal to the player of the pachinko machine 1 and give a sense of superiority to the player of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to this, when the operation is performed by the player, the special background may be displayed (+15 times) in the variable display 30 times instead of the variable display 15 times. Further, for example, the later the operation timing by the player, the greater the number of variable displays in which the special background is displayed. The variable display in which the special background is displayed depending on the timing of the operation during the extended operation display period. The number of times may be different. This can attract the player's interest in displaying the special background for a longer period of time. Further, for example, when the operation is performed according to a plurality of specific timings existing during the extended operation display period, the variable display number of times the special background is displayed may be increased. Further, for example, among a plurality of specific timings, +10 times when the operation is performed at the first specific timing, and +10 times when the operation is performed at the second specific timing, etc., depending on the number of operations according to the plurality of specific timings. The variable number of times the special background is displayed may be increased. Further, the variable display number of times that the special background is displayed may be reduced (for example, -1 time) by an operation other than the specific timing. According to this, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate at a specific timing.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 063AK of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 having a high ratio determined when the setting value is high and the setting value are set to a low setting value. Of the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 having a high ratio determined in the case, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed for a longer period than the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 (from T5). But T2 is longer). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending effect, and different characters are displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 suggesting that the setting value is advantageous is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the execution period of the ending effect in the feature unit 063AK is a common execution period regardless of whether the setting suggestion effect of aspect 1 is executed or the setting suggestion effect of aspect 2 is executed. Is. According to this, it is not necessary to change the execution period of the ending effect depending on the mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the control load on the main board 11 side can be reduced.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), by extending the period of the return prevention notification and the warning display, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed and the setting of the second aspect is performed. The difference in the execution period when the suggestion effect is executed is adjusted. By extending the execution period of the return prevention notification, it is possible to prevent forgetting to take the prepaid card or the like as a recording medium for games. In addition, as a warning display, the period of the immersive prevention display is extended, so that the immersiveness in the game can be reduced.

In the feature unit 063AK, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the lapse of a specific period, which is the execution period of the preparation effect, after the ending effect is started. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed after the period as the preparatory effect elapses, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the mode of the setting suggestion effect rather than executing the setting suggestion effect at the start of the ending effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the period of the preparatory effect in the feature unit 063AK is shorter than the execution period of the setting suggestion effect (T1 <T5 <T2). Therefore, after the lapse of a specific period, which is the execution period of the preparation effect, the setting suggestion effect for a period longer than the specific period is executed. According to this, it is possible to easily grasp the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, the feature unit 063AK performs an extension operation display, and when an operation is performed by the player within the extension operation display period, a special background is used in the 15 variable displays executed after the end of the jackpot game state. The image of the character corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is displayed. According to this, it can be grasped that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed even after the end of the big hit game state.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK, when the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, the special effect is also executed. The special effect is an effect of displaying an effect image around the character corresponding to the first aspect, and is an effect that is not executed when the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect. Further, as a special effect, the feature unit 063AK may output a special sound which is the same sound as the sound output when the jackpot game state is controlled. According to this, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect 1 It can be easily grasped.

(Modification example of feature part 063AK)
In the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, the modes 1 and 2 are prepared as the mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the mode 1 is determined in a high ratio when it is set to an advantageous setting value. Although a certain example has been shown, for example, the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 may be a setting suggestion effect of an aspect in which it is confirmed that the setting value is set to an advantageous value. The advantageous set value means a set value having a high ball ejection rate as described above, and the base value obtained by multiplying the number of so-called safe balls by the number of launching balls by 100 is 100 or more. (For example, set value 4 or more). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 in which the advantageous setting value is determined, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above embodiment, an example of displaying the image of the push button 31B as the extension operation display is shown (see FIG. 9-9 (E)), but in addition to this, the operation by the player is effective. The operation validity period that can be accepted may be displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. In this case, the operation validity period may be, for example, a meter display or a countdown display. Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the return prevention notification and the warning display are simultaneously performed is shown, but the return prevention notification and the warning display are alternately and repeatedly displayed, or T4 in FIG. 9-8. Of the period, the first half may be a return prevention notification and the second half may be a warning display.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, the period of the return prevention notification and the warning display is different depending on whether the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is performed or the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect is performed. An example of adjusting the execution period of the ending effect itself (T3 and T6 in FIG. 9-8) is shown, but in addition to this, the adjustment is made including the period of the next mode notification (T4 in FIG. 9-8). You may try to do it. Of the period of the return prevention notification and the warning display, one of them may be T6 and the other period may be T3.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed by displaying the special background (extending display) in the 15 times variable display performed after the end of the big hit game state. An example has been shown in which the player can visually recognize the fact and the player who could not take the image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect during the ending effect can take the image again. Is an example. If the player can recognize that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect has been performed after the end of the jackpot game state (capable of shooting as an image or a moving image), the extended display aspect is not limited to the special background, for example. , The hold display is set to the aspect of the character of the aspect 1, a special advance notice effect corresponding to the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 is executed, and the decorative pattern is different from the normal time, and the character of the aspect 1 is executed. May be added. In addition, it may be possible to select which of these modes is used depending on the operation timing of the player. According to this, since the extended display can be performed in the mode desired by the player, the game entertainment can be improved. Further, regardless of the operation timing of the player, it may be possible to select in which mode the extended display is performed, or it may be determined by lottery. Further, even when the operation is performed by the player, it may be possible to select again whether or not to perform the extended display by, for example, operating the cross key or the stick controller 31A.

Further, in the feature unit 063AK of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the setting suggestion effect of the first and second aspects is executed during the ending effect is shown, which is an example. If the execution period of the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect is longer than that of the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is arbitrary, and may be, for example, during a specific round game. It may be during variable display such as during reach production. If it is executed during the round game, it may be set in step S176 of FIG. 7, and if it is executed during the variable display, it may be set in the process of step S171 of FIG. 7 and executed in the process of step S172. ..

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion 048AK and the feature portion 063AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, when the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 063AK is not performed in the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect by the stop symbol in the feature unit 048AK may be executed. Further, for example, when the setting suggestion effect of the aspect 1 in the feature unit 063AK is executed in the ending effect, the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be further executed. In this case, it is different from FIG. 8-23. The setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be executed with reference to the table. That is, it is set to a high setting so as not to suggest that it is set to an unfavorable setting value even though it is suggested to be set to an advantageous setting value in the first aspect. The setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK may be executed with reference to the table in which the determination ratio is set for the mode suggesting that the condition is present. According to this, it is suggested that both the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 063AK and the setting suggestion effect in the feature unit 048AK are set to advantageous setting values, which gives the player a sense of expectation. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation of feature 82AK)
Subsequently, the feature 82AK will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 82AK can display a suggestion display whose display mode can be changed stepwise, and the display mode of the suggestion display has changed to a specific stage (for example, the meter is full). It is possible to execute a specific effect according to the fact that the count value of the counter has reached a predetermined value, the number of effect images has reached a predetermined number, and the like). The display pattern of the suggestion display includes a first display pattern that changes to a specific stage during the variable display when the display of the display is started, and a display pattern before the specific stage during the variable display when the display of the suggestion is started. A second display pattern that changes up to a stage and changes to a specific stage during the variable display after the variable display (for example, a pattern in which the display mode of the suggestion display changes stepwise over a plurality of variable displays). And at least include. The specific effect is an effect that is executed over a predetermined period while suggesting the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 82AK displays the suggestion display in the second display pattern, the suggestion display changes in the variable display in which the suggestion display is started, and then in a period shorter than a predetermined period. It is characterized in that it notifies that the display of the suggestion display is continued according to the timing at which the variable display ends and the variable display ends.

In this way, since the notification that the suggestion display continues to be displayed is performed according to the timing at which the variable display ends, the notification that the suggestion display continues during the variable display is performed, and the variable display is notified. Can be prevented from being perceived as having low expectations and losing interest. In other words, the player's expectation can be maintained until the timing when the variable display ends, and the interest of the effect related to the suggestion display can be improved.

In addition, the first display pattern of the suggestion display may be the first change pattern in which the suggestion display starts to change from the initial stage in the variable display in which the suggestion display is started. The second display pattern of the suggestion display may be a second change pattern in which the suggestion display starts changing from a predetermined stage after the initial stage in the variable display after the variable display in which the suggestion display is started. is there.

Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature 82AK will be described, but for the other portions, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the configuration of the other feature portion of the basic description may be appropriately adopted.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing the operation of the lookahead advance notice setting process of the feature unit 82AK. The lookahead advance notice process is executed in step S161 of FIG. In the lookahead advance notice setting process of the feature unit 82AK, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the start winning is generated by the game ball entering the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening ( Step 82AKS001). In the process of step 82AKS001, it may be determined whether or not the start-up prize has occurred, for example, by determining whether or not the effect control command for designating the occurrence of the start-up prize has been received from the main board 11. When it is determined that the start winning has not occurred (step 82AKS001; No), the lookahead advance notice setting process is terminated.

When it is determined that the start winning is generated (step 82AKS001; Yes), whether or not to execute the suggestion display effect related to the feature portion 82AK and the suggestion display effect pattern when executing are determined based on the start prize. (Step 82AKS002).

In the feature unit 82AK, when a specific effect is executed during the variable display, a suggestion display suggesting that the specific effect is executed is displayed, and a suggestion display effect in which the display mode of the suggestion display changes stepwise is executed. It is designed to be done. In the suggestion display effect, when the display mode of the suggestion display changes to a specific stage, the specific effect is executed thereafter. The specific effect may be executed immediately after the display mode of the suggestion display changes to a specific stage, or the execution of the specific effect is stocked when the display mode of the suggestion display changes to a specific stage. After that, a specific effect may be executed.

The specific effect may be, for example, an effect that announces / suggests that it will be a big hit. Specifically, it may be pseudo-ream, super reach, cut-in effect during reach, chance up effect, countdown effect, hold change notice, background change effect, or the like. The specific effect may be an effect that indicates useful information to the player, such as an effect that suggests a gaming state or an effect that suggests a set value.

In the process of step 82AKS002, first, based on the effect control command that specifies the determination result of the look-ahead determination received at the time of starting prize, a specific effect (pseudo-ream, super reach (in this embodiment, pseudo-reach, super reach) in the variable display corresponding to the start winning. It pre-reads whether or not the SP reach) and the cut-in effect during reach (cut-in) are executed, and determines whether or not the suggestion display effect is executed.

In step 82AKS002, for example, whether or not to execute the suggestion display effect is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 10-3 (A) according to the type of the specific effect. In this embodiment, the suggestion display effect is easily executed in the order of cut-in> SP reach> pseudo-ream in the order of the specific effect type. It is easier to execute. As described above, in this embodiment, the execution ratio of the suggestion display effect differs depending on the type of the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to have a sense of expectation as to which specific effect is executed by displaying the suggestion display.

The execution ratio shown in FIG. 10-3 (A) is an example, and the execution ratio of the suggestion display effect may be different depending on the type of the specific effect. Further, the execution ratio of the suggestion display effect according to the type of the specific effect may be arbitrary, and the suggestion display effect may be executed at the same rate regardless of which specific effect is executed. Further, the execution ratio of the suggestion display effect may be different depending on the display result of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed.

If none of the specific effects are executed in the variable display based on the look-ahead start prize, the suggestion display effect is determined without execution in step 82AKS002. In addition, even when the specific effect is not executed, the so-called Gase (the suggestion display does not change to a specific stage and the specific effect is not executed) suggestion display effect may be executed, but in this embodiment, the suggestion of Gase is executed. Whether or not to execute the display effect is determined at the start of the variable display. On the other hand, whether or not the suggestion display effect of Gase is executed may also be determined in step 82AKS002 based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination.

In the feature unit 82AK, as a suggestion display effect pattern which is a display pattern of the suggestion display, a first display pattern (once) in which the display mode of the suggestion display changes to a specific stage during the variable display in which the suggestion display is started. A pattern that changes to a specific stage during variable display) and a pattern that changes to a stage before a specific stage during variable display when the suggestion display is started, and is specified during variable display after the variable display. A second display pattern (a pattern that changes to a specific stage over two variable displays) is provided.

FIG. 10-2 is a timing chart of the suggestion display effect of the feature unit 82AK. FIG. 10-2 (A) is a timing chart of the suggestion display effect of the first display pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), in the first display pattern, a meter image (suggestion display) is displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing after the start of variable display, and the meters in the meter image are gradually increased. Then, the suggestion display effect that becomes MAX (specific stage) is executed. After that, a specific effect is executed during the variable display. After the meter reaches MAX, for example, an effect image indicating that the execution of the specific effect is in stock is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (A), another advance notice effect may be executed in parallel with the suggestion display effect.

FIG. 10-2 (B) is a timing chart of the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), in the second display pattern, the meter image (suggestion display) is displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display, and the meters in the meter image gradually increase. Then, the variable display ends without reaching MAX. At this time, at the end of the variable display, a continuous notification is executed to notify that the suggestion display effect will continue in the next variable display. Then, after the next variable display is started, the suggestion display effect is executed in which the meter in the meter image is gradually increased to reach MAX (specific stage). After that, a specific effect is executed during the variable display. As described above, in the second display pattern, the continuous notification of the suggestion display effect is executed at the end timing of the variable display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation for the variable display due to the continuous notification being executed before the end of the variable display. In other words, the expectation for the suggestion display effect can be maintained until the end of the variable display.

In the second display pattern, the period t1 from the start of change of the meter image to the end of the variable display is shorter than the execution period t2 of the specific effect (the shortest execution period among the plurality of types of specific effects). That is, in the second display pattern, the change of the meter image is started at the timing when the specific effect cannot be completed during the variable display. By doing so, the suggestion display effect can be executed even in the situation where it is recognized that the specific effect is not executed during the variable display from the situation of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Therefore, the suggestion display effect can be executed. The opportunity can be increased, and the player's expectation can be maintained regardless of the start timing of the suggestion display effect (the change start timing of the suggestion display).

In step 82AKS002, when it is decided to execute the suggestion display effect, it is determined which of the suggestion display effect patterns should be used. In step 82AKS002, the display result is pre-read in the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and the suggestion display effect pattern is determined, based on the effect control command that specifies the determination result of the look-ahead determination received at the time of the start winning. Here, the suggestion display effect pattern is determined, for example, at the ratio shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), depending on whether the display result is a big hit or whether or not there is super reach. In this embodiment, the second display pattern has a higher jackpot reliability and the rate of execution of super reach than the first display pattern. By doing so, it is possible to announce and suggest that a big hit or a super reach will occur depending on the effect pattern of the suggestion display effect. The determination ratio of the suggestion display effect pattern shown in FIG. 10-3 (B) is an example, and the determination ratio may be arbitrary. Further, the determination ratio of the suggestion display effect pattern may be different depending on the type of the specific effect.

Note that FIG. 10-3 (B) shows the determination ratio when there is pending information before the start winning prize this time. If there is no pending information before the start prize this time, the suggestion display effect is executed over the two variable displays. Since the suggestion display effect by the second display pattern cannot be executed, it is determined as the first display pattern. To.

After deciding whether or not to execute the suggestion display effect and the suggestion display effect pattern in step 82AKS002, whether or not to execute the lookahead advance notice effect different from the suggestion display effect based on the current start prize, and when to execute it. The lookahead notice type is determined (step 82AKS003).

In this embodiment, as the pre-reading notice type, which is a type of pre-reading notice effect, the hold change notice that changes the display mode of the corresponding hold display (active display) and the display result of the variable display of the notice target are stopped and displayed. A background change notice that changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a notice mode, and a decorative pattern that constitutes a predetermined chance eye in the image display device 5 in the variable display immediately before the variable display of the notice target, etc. There is a stop symbol notice to display the stop. As the look-ahead notice effect, other notice effects may be executed, or a plurality of types of look-ahead notice effects may be executed in parallel.

In the process of step 82AKS003, the display result and the variation category (rough classification of the variation pattern, etc.) are pre-read based on the effect control command for specifying the determination result of the look-ahead determination received at the time of the start winning, and the look-ahead notice effect is produced. Whether or not to execute and the type of look-ahead notice are determined. Further, in this embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the lookahead advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the lookahead advance notice type differ depending on whether or not the suggestion display effect is executed.

FIG. 10-4 (A) shows the presence / absence of execution of the lookahead notice and the determination ratio of the lookahead advance notice type (decision ratio in step 82AKS003) when it is decided not to execute the suggestion display effect in step 82AKS002. There is. FIG. 10-4 (B) shows the presence / absence of execution of the lookahead notice and the determination ratio of the lookahead notice type when it is decided to execute the suggestion display effect in step 82AKS002. Here, whether or not the display result is a big hit and whether or not there is a super reach determines whether or not the lookahead notice is executed and the type of the lookahead notice is determined. Then, when the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the jackpot reliability and the rate at which the super reach is executed are higher than when it is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, when the suggestion display effect is not executed, the hold change notice, the background change notice, and the stop symbol notice are executed at equal ratios as the look-ahead notice effect. When the display effect is not executed, only the stop symbol advance notice is executed as the pre-read notice effect, and the execution rate of the pre-read notice effect (execution rate at the time of super reach loss) is also high. In this way, when the suggestion display effect is executed, the stop symbol notice is easily executed as the lookahead notice effect, so that the stop symbol notice is given in parallel with the continuous notification of the suggestion display effect in the second display pattern. It will be easier to execute. That is, when the chance eye of the stop symbol notice is stopped, the ratio of continuous notification of the suggestion display effect being executed increases at the same timing. By doing so, the expectation for the suggestion display can be increased, and the effect of the decorative pattern when stopped is improved.

Further, when the suggestion display effect is executed, the execution of the lookahead advance notice effect that can be executed before the variable display of the advance notice target such as the hold change notice and the background change notice is restricted. By doing so, the suggestion display effect is started while the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, so that the display mode of the suggestion display changes to a specific stage and the specific effect is executed (suggestion). It is possible to prevent the player from first grasping that the display effect is not a mess, and the effect of the suggestion display effect is reduced.

Further, in step 82AKS003, when it is decided to execute the stop symbol notice, it is determined which symbol is to be stopped as a chance eye. In this embodiment, as a chance eye in the variable display immediately before the variable display to be announced, "even number alignment" consisting of only even number symbols, "odd number alignment" consisting of only odd number symbols, and "odd number alignment" in which consecutive numbers are lined up There is a "line".

FIG. 10-5 (A) shows the determination ratio of the chance eye when it is determined not to execute the suggestion display effect in step 82AKS002. FIG. 10-5 (B) shows the determination ratio of the chance eye when it is determined to execute the suggestion display effect in step 82AKS002. Here, depending on whether or not the displayed result is a big hit and whether or not there is a super reach, it is determined at one of the chances. Then, the jackpot reliability and the rate of execution of super reach increase in the order of "alignment"> "odd number alignment"> "even number alignment".

As shown in FIG. 10-5, when the suggestion display effect is executed, the ratio of being determined as "alignment" is higher than when the suggestion display effect is not executed. In this way, when the suggestion display effect is executed, the stop symbol notice at which the chance eye of the "line-up" is stopped can be easily executed, so that the suggestion display effect is continuously notified in the second display pattern. As a result, the chance of "line-up" is easily stopped, the expectation for the suggestion display can be increased, and the effect of the decorative pattern when stopped is improved.

The execution ratios and decision ratios shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5 are examples, and the execution ratios and decision ratios are arbitrary if it can be announced and suggested that a big hit or a super reach will be achieved by the lookahead advance notice production. It's fine. For example, even when the suggestion display effect is executed, the hold change notice or the background change notice may be executed. In this case, for example, the pending change notice or the background change notice may be executed after the display mode of the suggestion display reaches a specific stage. Further, the determination ratio of the chance item type may be the same regardless of the presence or absence of the suggestion display effect.

Although detailed determination ratios and the like are omitted here, in step 82AKS003, when it is decided to execute the hold change notice, the change pattern of the hold change notice effect mode (for example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display). ) Is determined. When it is decided to execute the background change notice, the effect mode (change pattern and change timing of the background image) of the background change notice is determined. By doing so, it is possible to announce / suggest that a big hit or a super reach will occur depending on the production mode of the lookahead advance notice effect.

After executing the process of step 82AKS003, the determination results in step 82AKS002 and step 82AKS003 are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 82AKS004), and a specific display (hold display or active display) corresponding to the current start winning is displayed. (For example, specific display control according to the presence or absence of a pending change notice) is performed (step 82AKS005), and the lookahead notice setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing the operation of the suggestion display effect determination process of the feature unit 82AK. The suggestion display effect determination process is executed at the start of variable display in the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. 7. The suggestion display effect determination process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the so-called Gase (the suggestion display does not change to a specific stage and the specific effect is not executed) when the specific effect is not executed. Is. In the suggestion display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is determined to execute the suggestion display effect (suggestion display effect that is not irrelevant) in the variable display this time (step 82AKS011). When it is decided to execute the suggestion display effect (suggestion display effect that is not irrelevant) (step 82AKS011; Yes), the suggestion display effect determination process is terminated.

When it is not decided to execute the suggestion display effect (suggestion display effect that is not irrelevant) (step 82AKS011; No), it is determined whether or not the display result of this variable display is non-reach loss (step 82AKS012). ). When the display result of the variable display this time is not a non-reach loss (step 82AKS012; No), that is, at least the variable display in which the reach is executed, the reach is performed even though the suggestion display effect of Gase is executed. In order to prevent inconsistencies in the effects such as the execution of, the suggestion display effect determination process is terminated. In addition, even when the reach is executed, the suggestion display effect of Gase may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect by executing the reach even though the suggestion display effect of Gase is executed.

When the display result of the variable display this time is non-reach loss (step 82AKS012; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion display effect of Gase and the suggestion display effect pattern when executing (step 82AKS013).

FIG. 10-7 shows the determination ratio in step 82AKS013. As shown in FIG. 10-7, when there is currently no pending information and it is not possible to execute the suggestion display effect of Gase by the second display pattern, the first display pattern may be determined. If there is currently pending information, it may be determined as the first display pattern or the second display pattern. In this case, the determination rate of the second display pattern is lower than that of the first display pattern. As described above, the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern is less likely to be distorted than the suggestion display effect of the first display pattern.

That is, in the variable display after the variable display in which the display of the suggestion display is started, when the suggestion display effect is executed in the second change pattern in which the suggestion display starts changing from a predetermined stage after the initial stage. Is less likely to be a false suggestion display effect than when the suggestion display effect is executed in the first change pattern in which the suggestion display starts changing from the initial stage in the variable display in which the suggestion display is started. There is. By doing so, the display mode of the suggestion display does not change to a specific stage even though the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern and the second change pattern is executed over a plurality of variable displays. It is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the specific effect is not executed.

The determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-7 is an example, and the determination ratio may be arbitrary. For example, the second display pattern (second change pattern) may not be determined, and the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern (second change pattern) may not be distorted. In addition, when the suggestion display effect of Gase is executed other than the non-reach loss, the execution rate of the suggestion display effect of Gase and the determination rate of the suggestion display effect pattern may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern and the display result. Further, contrary to the present embodiment, the suggestion display effect of the first display pattern (first change pattern) may be less likely to be distorted than the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern (second change pattern). ..

After executing the process of step 82AKS013, the determination result in step 82AKS013 is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 82AKS014), and the suggestion display effect determination process is completed.

FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart showing the operation of the processing at the end of the fluctuation of the feature unit 82AK. The lookahead advance notice process is executed at the end of the variable display in the effect process during the variable display in step S172 of FIG. 7. In the variable end processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern is being executed (step 82AKS021). If the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern is not being executed (step 82AKS021; No), the processing at the end of the fluctuation is terminated. For example, the suggestion display effect execution flag is set at the start of the suggestion display effect, and the flag is reset at the end of the suggestion display effect. In step 82AKS021, the suggestion display effect is executed by confirming the flag. It may be determined whether or not it is inside. Further, it may be determined whether or not it is the second display pattern by referring to the determination result of the suggestion display effect pattern.

If the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern is being executed (step 82AKS021; Yes), a setting for executing continuous notification for notifying that the suggestion display effect is continued (for example, effect control for executing continuous notification) Data is set, etc.) (step 82AKS022), and the processing at the end of fluctuation is completed.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the feature unit 82AK will be described. FIG. 10-9 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 82AK, and shows an example of the effect operation when the suggestion display effect of the first display pattern is executed. In FIG. 10-9 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 "left", "middle", and "right" by the downward arrow. It shows that there is. Here, when the suggestion display effect is executed, the meter image 82AK001 is displayed as the suggestion display as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B). In the suggestion display effect, an effect is executed in which the black portion (meter) of the meter image 82AK001 is gradually increased to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (C), when the meter in the meter image 82AK001 reaches MAX (specific stage), the execution of the specific effect is stocked as shown in FIG. 10-9 (D). As an image showing, the bomb production image 82AK002 is displayed.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (E), the numbers "7" are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the reach state is reached. Here, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (F), the effect image of the bomb effect image 82AK002 explodes, and as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), the display screen of the image display device 5 is blacked out. , As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), the reach effect of the super reach is started as a specific effect.

In this way, when the suggestion display effect is executed and the meter image 82AK001 as the suggestion display reaches MAX (specific stage), it is possible to execute the effect as if the specific effect is stocked. Then, by consuming the effect image 82AK002 of the bomb indicating that the execution of the specific effect is stocked, it is possible to execute the effect that has evolved into super reach as the specific effect.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of images indicating that the execution of the specific effect is stocked may be provided so that different images are displayed depending on the type of the stocked specific effect. Further, a plurality of images indicating that the execution of the specific effect is stocked may be displayed so that the execution of the plurality of specific effects is stocked. In this case, an image indicating that a plurality of executions of the specific effect have been stocked may be displayed in one suggestion display effect, or the suggestion display effect is executed a plurality of times and the suggestion display is at a specific stage each time. It is also possible to increase the number of images showing that the execution of the specific effect is stocked. For example, in a variable display in which a plurality of specific effects are executed, such as a variable display that becomes super reach via a pseudo-ream, an image showing that the suggestion display effect is executed a plurality of times and the execution of the specific effect is stocked. May be displayed. Then, at the execution timing of the specific effect, the effect may be executed so that the stock is consumed and the specific effect is executed.

FIG. 10-10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 82AK, and shows an example of the effect operation when the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern is executed. In FIG. 10-10 (A), the number “6” is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, and the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5C, It is shown that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in 5R. Further, although the meter image 82AK001 is displayed and the suggestion display effect is started, the meter is not increased.

In the case of the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern, after that, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), the variable display is executed until the end before the meter in the meter image 82AK001 reaches MAX (specific stage). When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) in each "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C and the variable display ends, the continuous notification image 82AK003 (indicating a pause) that notifies that the suggestion display effect will continue. (Depending on the production image) is displayed. In this way, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the continuous notification of the suggestion display effect is executed, so that the expectation in the variable display is not impaired until just before the stop display of the decorative symbol (end of the variable display), and the expectation is increased. Can be maintained.

The execution timing of the continuous notification of the suggestion display effect is not limited to the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in each "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol is stopped in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L. Others related to the stop of variable display, such as the timing of display, the timing of stop display of decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5R on the "right", the temporary stop until the final stop of all decorative symbols (when shaking fluctuates), etc. The continuous notification of the suggestion display effect may be executed at the timing of. Further, the execution timing of the continuous notification of the suggestion display effect may be one of a plurality of types. For example, by executing continuous notification while avoiding the fixed stop of the decorative symbol, the stopped symbol can be focused on. For example, pay attention to whether or not the stop symbol notice is executed (whether or not the chance eye is stopped). Can be made to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (C), the continuous notification image 82AK003 is erased at the start of the next variable display, and the suggestion display effect in which the meter is increased in the meter image 82AK001 is restarted. In this way, by deleting the continuous notification image 82AK003 according to the start timing of the next variable display, it becomes clear that the suggestion display effect has been restarted, and the next time the continuous notification of the suggestion display effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the expectation in the variable display from being reduced.

In the next variable display in which the continuous notification of the suggestion display effect is executed, the continuous notification image 82AK003 may be deleted at the timing when the meter increases after the start of the variable display. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing at which the meter increases in the next variable display in which the continuous notification is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (D), when the meter in the meter image 82AK001 reaches MAX (specific stage), the execution of the specific effect is stocked as shown in FIG. 10-10 (E). As an image showing, the bomb production image 82AK002 is displayed.

In addition, when the suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 10-10 (A) is Gase (Gase of the first display pattern), the meter image 82AK001 does not reach MAX (specific stage), and FIG. 10-10 (B' ), The variable display ends in the middle of the process. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (C'), the meter image 82AK001 is erased at the start of the next variable display or before the start. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the meter image 82AK001 that has not reached a specific stage from being continuously displayed so as not to reduce the expectation for the next variable display.

(Modification example of feature portion 82AK)
The feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

For example, the feature unit 063AK may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 82AK. That is, like the feature unit 063AK, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 82AK has a plurality of stages of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, 1 to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player). Regarding the setting means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process) that can be set to any of the setting values (such as a value up to 6 which is an advantageous setting value for the player) and the setting value in a predetermined period. A setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 063AKS007) that can execute the setting suggestion effect for making a suggestion is provided, and the first set value and the first set value are set as the plurality of stages of the set value. The setting suggestion includes at least a second setting value that is more disadvantageous than the first setting value (for example, a value from 1 that is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player to 6 that is the most advantageous setting value for the player). The effect execution mode includes a first mode in which the ratio of selection is high when the first set value is set, and a second mode in which the ratio of selection is high when the second set value is set. Aspects and are included (for example, "Aspect 1" is determined as the set value is set higher, while the ratio of "Aspect 2" is determined as the set value is set lower. The setting suggestion effect executing means executes the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect for a longer period of time than the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect (for example, shown in FIG. 10-8). As such, T2> T5, etc.) may be used. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, which suggests that the setting value is advantageous, is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In the above embodiment, the suggestion display effect of displaying the meter image 82AK001 as the suggestion display is executed, but the suggestion display is a display in which the effect mode changes stepwise and can be changed up to a specific stage. Often, it may be a counter, a clock, one that increases the number of displayed images, or the like. Further, a plurality of types of suggestion displays may be provided. In this case, the type of specific effect to be executed when the displayed suggestion display changes to a specific stage and the ratio of which specific effect is executed may be different. By doing so, the player pays attention to which suggestion display is displayed, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the suggestion display effect of displaying one meter image 82AK001 as the suggestion display is executed, but even if the suggestion display effect of displaying a plurality of suggestion displays at the same time is executed. Good. In this case, the type of the specific effect executed when each of the plurality of suggestion displays changes to a specific stage and the ratio of which specific effect is executed may be different. By doing so, the player pays attention to which suggestion display is displayed, and by displaying a plurality of suggestion displays, the player's expectation can be raised, and the interest of the game is enhanced. improves.

In the above embodiment, three types of look-ahead notice effect are executed: hold change notice, background change notice, and stop symbol notice. However, the type of lookahead notice effect may be two or less or four or more. Good. For example, at least the stop symbol notice may be executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and when the suggestion display effect is executed, the execution rate of the stop symbol notice may be increased. Further, when a look-ahead advance notice effect that can be executed at the execution timing of the continuous notification in the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern is provided other than the stop symbol advance, or when the continuous notification in the suggestion display effect of the second display pattern is executed, The look-ahead notice effect may be facilitated to be executed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion display effect is determined, and then the presence / absence and type of the lookahead advance notice effect are determined based on the determination result. And the type may be determined before determining whether or not to execute the suggestion display effect and the pattern. Further, the decision regarding the suggestion display effect and the lookahead advance notice effect may be made regardless of the respective decision results, or the decision regarding the suggestion display effect and the lookahead advance notice effect may be made collectively.

In the above embodiment, the first display pattern (first change pattern) that changes to a specific stage during one variable display and the second display that the suggestion display changes to a specific stage over the two variable displays. Although the suggestion display effect of the pattern (second change pattern) can be executed, there may be a pattern in which the suggestion display changes to a specific stage over three or more variable displays. In this case, the continuous notification of the suggestion display effect may be executed at the end timing of each variable display.

(Explanation of means relating to feature portion 82AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 82AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a feature unit 82AK) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to display a suggestion display (for example, meter image 82AK001) whose display mode can be changed stepwise, and a specific effect (for example, pseudo-ream, super reach) according to the change in the display mode of the suggestion display to a specific stage. , An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 82AKS002 or step S172) capable of executing the cut-in effect during reach).
The effect executing means has a first display pattern that changes to the specific stage during the variable display when the display of the suggestion display is started, and from the specific stage during the variable display when the display of the suggestion display is started. The suggestion display can be displayed in any pattern including at least a second display pattern that changes to the previous stage and changes to the specific stage during the variable display after the variable display (for example). 10-2, 10-9, 10-10),
The specific effect is an effect that is executed over a predetermined period while suggesting the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state.
When the suggestion display is displayed in the second display pattern, the effect executing means takes a shorter period than the predetermined period after the suggestion display changes in the variable display in which the suggestion display is started. A notification is given to the effect that the display of the suggestion display is continued according to the timing at which the variable display ends and the variable display ends (for example, FIG. 10-2).
According to such a configuration, by performing the notification according to the end of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the feeling of expectation from being reduced by the notification, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display before execution, overlapping with the period in which the notification to the effect that the suggestion display continues is performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120) that executes the processes of step 82AKS003 and step S172 is provided.
When the advance notice effect (for example, the pre-reading advance notice effect of the stop symbol advance notice) is executed, the notification that the suggestion display is continued is higher than when the advance notice effect is not executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when there is a suggestion display, the execution rate of the stop symbol notice is higher than when there is no suggestion display).
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the suggestion display.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
After the notification that the display of the suggestion display is continued is executed, the display related to the notification may be deleted according to the start timing of the next variable display (for example, FIG. 10-10).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the next variable display from being reduced.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
Variable display can be executed in a plurality of variable display areas (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R).
The effect executing means can execute the notification that the display of the suggestion display is continued at the timing when the variable display of the variable display area at the end of the plurality of variable display areas ends. (For example, FIG. 10-10) may be used.
With such a configuration, the expectation can be maintained until the final timing of the variable display.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the specific effect, and the ratio of displaying the suggestion display differs depending on the type of the specific effect to be executed (for example, FIG. 10-3 (A)). You may.
With such a configuration, it is possible to have a sense of expectation as to which specific effect will be executed.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
The effect executing means can display a plurality of the suggestion displays at the same time.
When a plurality of the suggestion displays are displayed at the same time, the type of the specific effect executed when the plurality of suggestion displays change to the specific stage may be different from each other.
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
One of a plurality of stages of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a value from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player). Setting means that can be set to the set value of (for example, CPU 103 that executes the set value change process) and
It is provided with a setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 063AKS007) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that makes a suggestion regarding the set value in a predetermined period.
The setting value of the plurality of steps includes at least a first setting value and a second setting value which is more disadvantageous than the first setting value (for example, 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player is most advantageous to the player). (Values up to 6 etc.),
In the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect, a first mode in which the ratio selected when the first set value is set is high and a ratio selected when the second set value is set are included. A high second aspect is included (for example, in "aspect 1", the higher the set setting value is, the higher the rate of determination is increased, while in "aspect 2", the set value is set. The lower the rate, the higher the rate of determination),
The setting suggestion effect executing means executes the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect for a longer period of time than the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect (for example, T2> T5 as shown in FIG. 10-8).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, which suggests that the setting value is advantageous, is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Explanation of means related to feature 83AK)
The feature portion 82AK also includes the feature portion 83AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 83AK is
It is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a feature unit 82AK) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
It is possible to display a suggestion display (for example, meter image 82AK001) whose display mode can be changed stepwise, and a specific effect (for example, pseudo-ream, super reach) according to the change in the display mode of the suggestion display to a specific stage. , An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 82AKS002 or step S172) capable of executing the cut-in effect during reach).
In the variable display in which the display of the suggestion display is started, the effect executing means is after the first change pattern in which the suggestion display starts changing from the initial stage and the variable display in which the display of the suggestion display is started. In the variable display of, it is possible to change the suggestion display in any pattern including at least a second change pattern in which the suggestion display starts changing from a predetermined stage after the initial stage (for example, FIG. 10-2, Fig. 10-9, Fig. 10-10),
In the second change pattern, the rate at which the suggestion display changes up to the specific stage is higher than in the first change pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-7, the suggestion display effect of Gase is the first. The execution rate of the second display pattern is lower than that of the display pattern),
When the variable display ends while the suggestion display is displayed, the effect executing means notifies that the display of the suggestion display continues according to the timing at which the variable display ends (for example, FIG. 10). -2).
According to such a configuration, by performing the notification according to the end of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the feeling of expectation from being reduced by the notification, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display before execution, overlapping with the period in which the notification to the effect that the suggestion display continues is performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120) that executes the processes of step 82AKS003 and step S172 is provided.
When the advance notice effect (for example, the pre-reading advance notice effect of the stop symbol advance notice) is executed, the notification that the suggestion display is continued is higher than when the advance notice effect is not executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when there is a suggestion display, the execution rate of the stop symbol notice is higher than when there is no suggestion display).
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the suggestion display.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
After the notification that the display of the suggestion display is continued is executed, the display related to the notification may be deleted according to the start timing of the next variable display (for example, FIG. 10-10).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the expectation for the next variable display from being reduced.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
Variable display can be executed in a plurality of variable display areas (for example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R).
The effect executing means can execute the notification that the display of the suggestion display is continued at the timing when the variable display of the variable display area at the end of the plurality of variable display areas ends. (For example, FIG. 10-10) may be used.
With such a configuration, the expectation can be maintained until the final timing of the variable display.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the specific effect, and the ratio of displaying the suggestion display differs depending on the type of the specific effect to be executed (for example, FIG. 10-3 (A)). You may.
With such a configuration, it is possible to have a sense of expectation as to which specific effect will be executed.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
The effect executing means can display a plurality of the suggestion displays at the same time.
When a plurality of the suggestion displays are displayed at the same time, the type of the specific effect executed when the plurality of suggestion displays change to the specific stage may be different from each other.
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
One of a plurality of stages of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, a value from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value for the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value for the player). Setting means that can be set to the set value of (for example, CPU 103 that executes the set value change process) and
It is provided with a setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 063AKS007) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that makes a suggestion regarding the set value in a predetermined period.
The setting value of the plurality of steps includes at least a first setting value and a second setting value which is more disadvantageous than the first setting value (for example, 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player is most advantageous to the player). (Values up to 6 etc.),
In the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect, a first mode in which the ratio selected when the first set value is set is high and a ratio selected when the second set value is set are included. A high second aspect is included (for example, in "aspect 1", the higher the set setting value is, the higher the rate of determination is increased, while in "aspect 2", the set value is set. The lower the rate, the higher the rate of determination),
The setting suggestion effect executing means executes the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect for a longer period of time than the setting suggestion effect of the second aspect (for example, T2> T5 as shown in FIG. 10-8). You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the setting suggestion effect of the first aspect, which suggests that the setting value is advantageous, is performed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can execute variable display, can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and has a disadvantageous set value (for example, 1 to 3). A gaming machine (for example, a feature unit 82AK) capable of setting any of a plurality of set values including an advantageous set value (for example, 4 to 6) having a higher advantage for the player than the disadvantage set value. In the pachinko gaming machine 1), it is possible to display a suggestion display (for example, meter image 82AK001) whose display mode can be changed stepwise, and the display mode of the suggestion display is changed to a specific stage. An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 82AKS002 or step S172) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, pseudo-ream, super reach, cut-in effect during reach) is provided, and the effect execution means The first display pattern that changes to the specific stage during the variable display when the display of the suggestion display is started, and the stage that changes to the stage before the specific stage during the variable display when the display of the suggestion display is started. However, the suggestion display can be displayed in any pattern including at least a second display pattern that changes to the specific stage during the variable display after the variable display (for example, FIG. 10-2, FIG. 10-9, FIG. 10-10), the specific effect is an effect that is executed over a predetermined period while suggesting the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state, and the effect executing means is the first. When the suggestion display is displayed in the two display patterns, after the suggestion display changes in the variable display in which the display of the suggestion display is started, the variable display ends in a period shorter than the predetermined period, and the variable display is completed. According to the timing at which the display ends, the notification means that the display of the suggestion display continues (for example, FIG. 10-2) is notified, and further, the determining means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of determining to control the advantageous state A specific suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) that suggests that the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 5 is executed and that the advantageous state is controlled based on the determination result of the determination means For example, after the suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-18) that can be executed in the mode including the cut-in effect of the pattern CI-3 and the mode not including the pattern CI-3. The portion for executing the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7), and the suggestion effect execution means is set to the disadvantageous set value. When it is not determined by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect cannot be performed (for example, FIG. 11-21 (B)). As shown in the above, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of alignment, the cut-in effect cannot be executed by the pattern CI-3. ), And when it is set to the advantageous set value and it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect in an aspect including the specific suggestion effect can be executed (for example,). , As shown in FIGS. 11-21 (C) to 11-21 (E), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display result is out of order. In the case, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3), and when the suggestion effect is executed, it may be controlled to the advantageous state after it is once suggested that it is not controlled to the advantageous state. When the player has a special pattern to be notified (a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect shown in FIG. 11-6) and is controlled to the advantageous state by the special pattern, the above The rate at which the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect is executed is lower than the rate at which the suggestion effect of the aspect not including the specific suggestion effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 11-21 (A) to 11). As shown in -21 (E), when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect. A part in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than that in the case of performing the cut-in effect).

According to such a configuration, by performing the notification according to the end of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the feeling of expectation from being reduced by the notification, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. In addition, when it is suggested that the suggestion effect including the specific suggestion effect is executed and the advantageous state is not controlled, the advantageous state is set in the special pattern even though the player recognizes that the advantageous set value is set. By notifying that the game is controlled by the player, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in the recognition.

In addition to the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect may be performed when the suggestion display is displayed. For example, which of the first display pattern and the second display pattern is used to display the suggestion display is determined by a lottery using a selection table in which the selection ratio of each display pattern differs according to the set value. As a result, the more advantageous the set value is for the player, the easier it is that the suggestion display is displayed in a specific type of display pattern (for example, the second display pattern). By doing so, when the suggestion display is displayed in a specific type of display pattern, the expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player is improved, so that the game interest is improved. Can be done.
Further, if the suggestion of the set value is performed by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements of a suggestion effect of a mode including a specific suggestion effect and a display pattern of the suggestion display), the plurality of elements are advantageous to the player. When a setting value is suggested, the player can be more confident that the setting value is favorable to the player, and even if a certain factor does not suggest a setting value favorable to the player. If an advantageous setting value is suggested by other factors, the player can maintain a sense of expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in interest and reduce a decrease in game interest due to an error in recognition, it is possible to control a favorable state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. And any one of a plurality of setting values including a disadvantageous setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantageous setting value (for example, 4 to 6) having a higher advantage for the player than the disadvantageous setting value. Is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of setting the set value of, and is a determining means capable of determining control to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. A specific suggestion effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-3) is provided as a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled based on the determination result of the determination means. Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-18, and then executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7). When the suggestion effect executing means is set to the disadvantage setting value and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the specific suggestion effect is performed. The suggestion effect of the including aspect cannot be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display is performed. If the result is out of order, it is determined that the cut-in effect is set to the advantageous setting value (a portion that cannot be executed in the pattern CI-3), and that the determination means controls the advantageous state. When not, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 (C) to 11-21 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. If the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is out of alignment, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3), and when the suggestion effect is executed, the above A special pattern in which it is once suggested that the player is not controlled in the advantageous state and then notified that the player is controlled in the advantageous state (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect shown in FIG. 11-6). ), And when the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio at which the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect is executed is the specific indication. It is lower than the rate at which the suggestion effect of the mode that does not include the incitement effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 (A) to 11-21 (E), the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect). When the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect with the pattern CI-3 is set lower than when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot without executing the revival effect. The part that is done) A game machine is mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

Hereinafter, the feature portions of other morphological examples will be described.
(Explanation of feature section 208SG)

Next, the game machine in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-39.

First, FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 208SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 208SG003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 208SG003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is the left game area 208SG002L by the operation of the ball striking handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 208SG002L, and in the right game area 208SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 208SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 208SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 208SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 208SG003 are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052, is housed in the board case 208SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 208SG201.

Since the board case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 208SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003. Further, since the lock switch 208SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 208SG051. Further, the lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. Although the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the substrate case 208SG201, a display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 208SG201. That is, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 208SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the release sensor 208SG09 are turned on when the power is turned on, the set value is changed and the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting changeover switch 208SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

Then, by turning off the lock switch 208SG051 while any numerical value from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new set value. To. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 sends a setting value designation command, which will be described later, to the effect control board 12 regardless of whether or not a new setting value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the set value designation command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special figure, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Device 208SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 208SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 208SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 208SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 208SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 208SG002R. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG 132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 208SG 133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 208SG 134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The results can be derived and displayed.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 208SG025A and the second hold indicator 208SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold indicator 208SG025A and second hold indicator 208SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 208SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when there is one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 208SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 208SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 208SG331 that can detect that the 1 movable body 208SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321 and the second movable body 208SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. The origin detection sensor 208SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 208SG332.

FIG. 11-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the error (abnormal) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in the feature unit 208SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-6 shows the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach in which a super reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, the super reach variation pattern may be provided with 5 or more super reach variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 11-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. , Super reach γ, and super reach δ are set shorter. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach The special figure fluctuation pattern is set longer in the order of δ, super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit after once notifying that the variable display result is out of order as the reach effect of the super reach γ. A variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 11-6) for executing the revival effect is provided. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect is set to have a longer special figure fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and a shorter special figure fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ. However, it is an exceptionally high fluctuation pattern (100%) with the highest expectation of big hits.

In the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different even if the variation pattern is the same, depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-14, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, and the second special figure display result determination shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10. Table, jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

11-7 to 11-10 are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In FIG. 11-7 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 11-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 11-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 11-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, which is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, up to 1020-1383 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 11-7 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 11-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 11-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 11-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 11-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1317 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 11-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1556 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 11-8 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 11-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 11-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 11-9 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 11-9 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 11-9 (D) is a second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1383 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 11-9 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 11-9 (F) is a second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 11-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 11-10 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 11-10 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 11-10 (D) is a second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1556 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 11-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 11-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probabilistic state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs probabilistic change control, the probability that it is determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (the present embodiment). In the feature unit 208SG of, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/240 when the set value is 4. Compared to 1/220 when the set value is 5 and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state is higher (this). In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, when the set value is 3, 1/160, and when the set value is 4, 1 / 140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher than in the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-10 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

11-11 (A) and 11-11 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 11-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 11-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot types, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probability variation jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss used when it is pre-determined to make the variable display result "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the revival effect are executed. Not Super Reach γ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-4), Super Reach γ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-5), Super Reach δ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, 51 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is assigned, and 401 to 650 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, and 651 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect. It is assigned to (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern for big hits is determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination table of 1, that is, the pachinko. Although the embodiment in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the set value set in the game machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , The determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern may be different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the variation pattern of small hits from 0 to 997 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the small hit is 2 or more. Fluctuation pattern may be provided.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super Random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β off (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PA2-5). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value in the possible range.

As shown in FIG. 11-14 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for a low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 450 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super are corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4. Reach α out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), Super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) Super reach γ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-4), Super reach δ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 11-14 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 913 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach γ. It is assigned to PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β off (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PS2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 11-14 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of alignment (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of alignment (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ out of alignment (PA2-5) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the MR3 can take.

As shown in FIG. 11-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2). 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of order (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of out of super reach γ (PA2-4). Therefore, 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of the super reach δ.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 850 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 851 to 930 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Fluctuation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach γ, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach δ, that is, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach Since the fluctuation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach not being executed.

In the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation Although the respective determination ratios exemplify the completely same form between the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and these fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation and the fluctuation of the super reach β deviation are illustrated. The determination ratios of the pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation may be different for each set value.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and the fluctuation of either non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination rate may be the same.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is more non-reach. The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 11-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-14 (A) to 11-14 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 208SG020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically executed according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

There are a plurality of types of effect control flag setting units that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the data constituting the start winning command buffer at the time of winning is stored in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display is provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) or the hold memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the 1st special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the 2nd special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning associate these commands, and the 1st special figure hold storage and the 2nd special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area (entry) for storing separately from the hold storage is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted up one by one so that it does.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. I will go.

Next, the process executed by the CPU 103 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. 11-15 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, the CPU 103 first receives a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is the predetermined upper limit value (the number of reserved stored figures of the first special figure). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (208SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first start port switch 22A is off at 208SGS501a (208SGS501a; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value at 208SGS502 (208SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (. For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 208SGS505 (208SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (208SGS506).

When the second start port switch is not on (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (208SGS505; Y), the start winning determination process ends.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first 2 Numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (208SGS 511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is used. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (208SGS513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and then the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS516), and then the start winning determination process is performed. To finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-16 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by 208SGS512 of FIG. 11-15 as a winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 208SG, in the special symbol normal processing (step S22 of FIG. 5), the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the display according to the set value are displayed. Select the result judgment table (see FIGS. 11-7 to 11-10), and use the selected display result judgment table to set the special figure display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "big hit" and make a big hit game state. It is determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 208SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. Do. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes the pre-reading advance notice effect such as the hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 208SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (208SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state (high probability high base state) when the probability change flag is on, and is in the time saving state (low probability high base state) when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on. When both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off, it is sufficient to specify that the normal state (low probability low base state).

Following the processing of the 208SGS521, the CPU 103 specifies a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, the display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the start port buffer value is "1", when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is for the first special drawing shown in FIG. 11-7 (A). When the display result judgment table is set and the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probability change state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) is set and the set value is 2. When the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-7 (C) is set, the set value is 2, and the game state is the probability change state. If there is, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-7 (D) is set, and if the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, FIG. 11-7 (E). ) Is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-7 (F) is set. To set.

Further, when the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-8 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-8 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 11-8 (E). The display result determination table for the first special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-8 (F) is set. ..

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-9 (B) is set, and the set value is 2 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-9 (C) is set, and when the set value is 2 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-9 (D) is set and the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 11-9 (E). The display result determination table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-9 (F) is set. ..

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-10 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-10 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-10 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 11-10 (E). The display result determination table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-10 (F) is set. ..

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". In the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table is compared with the value of the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, and the disorder is described. If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a big hit, and if the value of the random value MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a small hit. Then, if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the numerical range of the big hit determination value and outside the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined to be out of range.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the 208SGS525 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in the 208SGS525 (208SGS527). When it is determined that the small hit does not occur, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of alignment (208SGS527; N), the first symbol designation is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "out of alignment". The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

When the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-14 is selected and set, and the process proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS529). When the time saving flag is set. (208SGS528; Y) selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 11-14 (D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined by the 208SGS526 that the variable display is a big hit (208SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the jackpot is A, a third symbol designation command when the jackpot is B, and a fourth symbol when the jackpot is C. The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (208SGS534), and then the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-13 (A) is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (208SGS535). ), Proceed to 208SGS536.

Further, when the 208SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (208SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". Is executed (208SGS531), the variation pattern determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is selected and set (208SGS532), and the process proceeds to 208SGS536.

In the feature unit 208SG, in the deviation pattern determination table A to the deviation variation pattern determination table D, determination values of 1 to 700 are commonly assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. 701 to 997 are assigned the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

Therefore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, so that the determination of non-reach and super reach is the determination. Even if the number of reserved memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D is used to determine the variation pattern. Is to be judged.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532,208SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (208SGS536). In this feature unit 208SG, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. 11-17 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG. 7.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in the 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning are stored for one buffer number. It shifts to the upper side one by one (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing the 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (208SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol Determine the combination (big hit symbol). When the received display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, for example, as a stop symbol, a decorative symbol in which 3 symbols are arranged in odd numbers other than "7" and "3" Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Then, when the received display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with "7" or "3" as stop symbols (big hit). Design) is decided. When the received display result specification command is the fifth variable table uncle result specification command indicating a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" and "246", and three consecutive even numbers (or three consecutive even numbers). Determine the combination of decorative symbols (small hit symbol) such as (odd number). Then, when the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating loss, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (missing symbols) different from the above-mentioned large hit symbol or small hit symbol is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

After the execution of the 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of the super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach may be specified from the variation pattern specification command read out in 208SG275. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach (208SG277; Y), a cut for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in effect described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. The in-effect determination process (208SGS278) is executed, and the process proceeds to 208SGS279. If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, in the 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (208SGS279). As shown in FIGS. 11-27 to 11-29, the advance notice effect is an effect that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach variable pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach or super reach variable pattern. It is a production that can be performed during the period from the end to the timing of reaching.

After executing the 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (208SGS282). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. May select the variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (variable display time) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (208SGS283). In addition, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (208 SGS285).

11-18 to 11-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ or super reach δ (208SGS301; Y). N) further determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS302).

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect (208SGS303). .. When the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type (208SGS304) and determines whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). ..

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. Proceed to. In 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fluctuation pattern being PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-31, the cut-in effect in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment displays the image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of the super reach γ. Then, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to the pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-31, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005w together with the blue effect, and the effect pattern is If the pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005x together with the red effect, and if the effect pattern is the pattern CI-3, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005y together with the golden effect. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS307). Proceed to 208SGS308. In 208SGS307, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10% based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. Determined by the ratio of. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

After executing the 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is decided (208SGS308; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), The cut-in effect determination process is completed.

Further, in the case of the 208SGS303, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect (208SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The set value is specified (208 SGS311), and it is determined whether or not the specified set value is any of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified based on the set value designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed. When the timer for waiting for the start of the cut-in effect has timed out, the process table for the cut-in effect is set according to the determined effect pattern. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table. The cut-in effect may be executed by controlling 9 etc.).

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS313; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), the cut-in effect is executed based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS3316) is determined, and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS316, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), the cut-in is based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit A or big hit B. The non-execution of the production is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. The presence or absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS317), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS317, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), the cut-in effect is not produced based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. The execution is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of alignment. Whether or not to execute the effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS318), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS318, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 55% based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order. Determined by percentage. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS312 is any of 4 to 6 (208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 has a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of 4. It is determined whether or not (208SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined (208SGS325), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS325, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS324; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS326, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS327). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS327; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS328), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS328, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS327; N), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. Whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 329), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (C), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 in the effect control CPU 120. Is determined (208SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined (208SGS334), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS334, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS333; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in the 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS336). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS336; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS337), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS337, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (D), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 35%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS336; N), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. Whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 338), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (D), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 is variable, assuming that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. It is determined whether or not the display result is a big hit (208SGS339). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS342), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS342, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS341; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS343), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type of jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS344). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS344; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS345), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS345, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (E), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS344; N), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. Whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 346), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (E), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in the 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). .. Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. ~ 208 The processing of SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS354, as shown in FIG. 11-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS353; N), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS355), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are determined. To execute. In 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 11-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS351 (208SGS351; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. Executes the processing of. In 208SGS356, as shown in FIGS. 11-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in is performed. When the variable display result is the lowest (big hit expectation) when the effect is not executed and the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Expectation of big hit in cut-in production: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2 <pattern CI-3 <pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, it is determined that the variable display result is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the jackpot C regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21, 11-22 and 11-24, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect is performed by the pattern CI-3. Regarding the execution ratio, the lowest setting (0%) is made when the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach γ and out of super reach δ. Then, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect-the set value when the per reach γ jackpot / super reach δ jackpot If is 4 and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the set value is 5 and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation pattern. Is set so that the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 increases in the order of the case where is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect.

Further, paying attention when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1-3, While it is confirmed that the variable display result is a big hit (any of big hit A to big hit C) when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is 4 to 6, the variable display result may be out of alignment even when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3. The jackpot expectation when the effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 is set low. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is confirmed that the set value set in is one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, paying attention to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3 rather than the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. And the rate of execution in pattern CI-4 is set low. For this reason, in the case where the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the cut-in effect is executed by CI-3 and the disappointment is notified, so that the pachinko gaming machine Even though the player recognizes that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the revival effect is executed later and the pachinko is notified that it is a big hit. It is suppressed that the player is discouraged because it is uncertain whether or not the set value set in the gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. Attention is paid to the case where the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the same in all the set values, but the variable display result is out of order. The higher the set value, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 (the pattern CI-3 execution rate at the time of deviation when the set values 4 to 6 are set: the set value 4 < Set value 5 <Set value 6).

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, and the variable display result is out of order. Since the frequency of the game becomes higher, the player can be expected that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. If the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display result is different, the gaming state is low accuracy and high base state or low accuracy when the gaming state is high accuracy and high base state. The cut-in effect is set to be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display in the high accuracy and high base state, and the variable display result is out of order, so that the gaming state is low accuracy. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to any of 4 to 6 to encourage the player to continue the game, so that the gaming interest can be improved. ing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 (B) to 11-21 (E), paying attention to the case where the variable display result is out of alignment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in. The execution rate of the production is set high. That is, in this feature unit 208SG, it is suggested that the ratio itself at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is out of alignment is set to any of the set values of 4 to 6 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern with high expectation of big hits, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22 is only an example, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. It may be different from the feature unit 208SG as appropriate. However, when the determination ratios of the effect patterns of these cut-in effects are appropriately different, the tendency of the jackpot expectation of each effect pattern (big hit expectation in the cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2). By maintaining the <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself, the player does not misunderstand the jackpot expectation according to the production pattern of the cut-in effect when executing the cut-in effect. Is desirable.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Although a mode in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is changed according to the set value and the variable display result set in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect may be always executed during the variable display. In the case where the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, When the variable display result is out of order, the ratio assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect (see FIGS. 11-21 (C) to 11-21 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 with a low expectation of big hit or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the ratio of the cut-in effect executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to be different from the feature unit 208SG. By doing so, the cut-in effect is excessively executed in the pattern CI-3 while improving the interest by executing the cut-in effect during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 11-17. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big hit or a miss (208SGS362; N), the execution of the cut-in effect is further determined. Whether or not, that is, whether or not any production pattern of the cut-in effect is stored is determined (208SGS363).

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored cut-in effect effect pattern is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364). ). When the stored cut-in effect effect pattern is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. , Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is the pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS366; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS367), and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big hit type (208SGS368).

When the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS366; N), the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the processing of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 15%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This is a case where the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation (PA2-4).

As shown in FIGS. 11-26 (C) and 11-30, the pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005s of the character A together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the pattern YE-2 is an effect pattern. The image display device 5 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005t of the character B together with the red effect, and the pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005u of the character C together with the golden effect on the image display device 5. The pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying the collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is 50%. Determined by percentage. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 5%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Also,
Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes the big hit is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is a pattern. Variable display in the order of execution in YE-1, the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2, the advance notice effect is executed in YE-3, and the advance notice effect is executed in YE-4. The rate at which the result is a big hit is set to be high (expectation of big hit of notice effect: not execute notice effect <execute in pattern YE-1 <execute in pattern YE-2 <execute in pattern YE-3 <pattern Executed with YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), when the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined or the cut-in effect is lower than the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the pattern CI- When the execution in 1 or the pattern CI-2 is decided, the advance notice effect may be executed in the pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is the jackpot C. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the game also determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (A), as the effect pattern of the cut-in effect, the pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, or the variable display result is a big hit. When the pattern CI-4 that confirms that the jackpot type is jackpot C is determined, YE-3 and YE-4 are used as the effect pattern of the advance notice effect regardless of the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern. It is set so that it will not be executed. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only by the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2, so that the variable display result is a big hit, which is the start of the cut-in effect. It is prevented that the player recognizes the timing before the timing (the start timing of the advance notice effect). Furthermore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, neither the advance notice effect nor the cut-in effect is executed in an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, so that the player is excessively opposed to the variable display result being a big hit. It is prevented from expecting.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (208SGS370). When the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern determined by any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to give a notice. The production determination process is completed (208SGS372). When it is determined not to execute the advance notice effect (208SGS370; N), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

When the execution of the advance notice effect is determined in the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed, and the advance notice is given. When the effect start waiting timer expires, the advance notice effect process table according to the determined effect pattern is set. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the advance notice effect process table. Etc.), and the advance notice effect may be executed.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 (A) to 11-27 (C), non-reach In the out-of-range fluctuation pattern, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 during the variable display, and in the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach during the variable display in the pattern YE-. It is possible to execute with 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the fluctuation pattern of super reach α off and super reach β off, the advance notice effect is given in the period before reach during the variable display, pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. It can be executed in 3. It should be noted that the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation, the super reach α deviation, and the super reach γ deviation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation and the super reach δ deviation, the advance notice effect can be executed by the patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. In the period after the reach, the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to pattern CI-3. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 (A) and 11-29 (B), in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach YE-1 to 1. The pattern YE-4 can be executed, and the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to the pattern CI-4 in the period after the reach. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 at the time of executing the variable display in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-30 to 11-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (E), when the execution of the advance notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is pattern YE- in the image display device 5. It is executed in any of 1 to pattern YE-4. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2. When the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5 and the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of the character C is displayed with the golden effect on the image display device 5. When the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the rainbow-colored effect.

At this time, the player expects a big hit depending on which character's image 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is, and the color of the effect displayed together with the image of these characters. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed by the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is executed only by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible.

When the variable display is a variable display of the super reach γ, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination of reach as shown in FIGS. 11-31 (A) to 11-31 (C), and then the super reach is displayed. A reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight in this feature unit 208SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (D), when the cut-in effect execution start timing during the reach effect of the super reach γ is reached, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image of the push button 31B, and the player A promotion notification is performed to urge the user to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. When the reception period elapses, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-1
When the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with the blue effect on the image display device 5 and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5 and cut. When the in-effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed together with the golden effect on the image display device 5, and when the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005y. The cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player decides which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, and 208SG005z is the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5, and the color of the effect displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) and 11-32 (B), when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (variation pattern of the super reach γ out of line), the super reach γ As a reach effect result (battle effect result), when the ally character loses to the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and the variable display ends. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) and 11-32 (C), when the variable display variation pattern is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the revival effect). , As the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, when the ally character wins the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and the variable display ends.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) and 11-32 (D) to 11-32 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect). In the case of (variation pattern), it is notified that the variable display result is once out of order due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. Then, when the revival effect is executed, it is notified again that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character reverses to the enemy character and wins as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. The variable display ends.

Although not shown in particular, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ, after the decorative symbol is displayed in a combination of reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same manner as the reach effect of super reach γ. Battle production) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. The battle production as the reach production of Super Reach δ may be the same as the battle production as the reach production of Super Reach γ, but the characters to be played against and the development of the battle are partially different. You may.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-21, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI. While it is confirmed that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing in -3, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in effect is produced. There is a case where the variable display result is out of alignment when executed in the pattern CI-3. That is, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. , When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can pay attention to whether the variable display result is a big hit or a miss, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-21, after notifying that the variable display result is out of order as a variable pattern in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect. Super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes resurrection effect, PB1-5) and super reach that does not execute resurrection effect to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot by executing the resurrection effect A fluctuation pattern of γ jackpot (PB1-4) is provided, and when variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the fluctuation of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than that in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. Therefore, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is out of order, the set value set by the player in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Even if it recognizes that is any of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6 by notifying that the revival effect is executed and the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in recognizing that it is one of the above.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the disadvantage setting values are set to 1 to 3 and the advantageous setting values are set to 4 to 6 as the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect or the advance notice effect is different depending on whether the set value is the disadvantageous set value or the advantageous set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the disadvantage setting value includes 1 and the advantage setting value includes 6, they may be set in any range in which the values do not overlap with each other. Specifically, the disadvantage setting value may be 1 to 5 and the advantage setting value may be only 6, or the disadvantage setting value may be only 1 and the advantage setting value may be 2 to 6.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the suggestion effect in the present invention is described as a reach effect is illustrated, but the invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect in the present invention is being variably displayed. As long as it is an effect that can be executed, for example, an effect other than the reach effect may be used, such as a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop of a decorative pattern and a revariable display are repeatedly executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 (C) to 11-21 (E), the fluctuation of the super reach γ deviation when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, and the higher the set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the player can be expected to be set, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line. Illustrates a mode in which the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. The pachinko game is not limited, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line, the pachinko game Regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, the ratio at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be the same ratio. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the deviation of the super reach γ, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. It can be difficult to identify the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, which reach effect is to be executed and whether to execute the revival effect is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and is also determined in FIG. 11-13. As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table of 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the revival effect during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the execution rate of the resurrection effect during the variable display follows the set value that determines the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit, so the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection effect is executed during the variable display. And can improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is illustrated by exemplifying a form that is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be appropriately determined from the display result and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-6 and 11-22, as the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ (PA2-5 and PB1-6). Is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result is always a big hit, so that the variation of the super reach effect increases and the super Since the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the reach δ and the player can pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit, the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ is provided has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Therefore, it is also possible not to provide a variation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (or until the end timing of the variable display) and the reach. There is a cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect. Further, the advance notice effect can be executed by any of a plurality of effect patterns (patterns YE-1 to pattern YE-4) having different jackpot expectations. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-26, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. Determines the effect pattern from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot, when the advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing it in YE-3 or YE-4. Therefore, if it is decided to execute the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible to pay attention to the crab until the variable display is completed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28, during the variable display of 1, the advance notice effect is set before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). By making it executable during the period until reach), if the variable display result becomes a big hit, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big hit from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. This can be prevented and the deterioration of the game interest can be prevented.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the advance notice effect can be executed at the timing prior to the cut-in effect during the variable display of 1, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect during the variable display that is executed before the variable display that executes the cut-in effect. Further, the advance notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect, so that the variable display result is obtained in the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect. It may be possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is a big hit and prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 and 11-22, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit type is always big hit C when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is changed to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw attention to the player whether or not it is executed. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the big hit type is the big hit A or the big hit B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result. In the case of a miss, it is possible to make the player think that even if it is a big hit, it may have been a big hit A or a big hit B, so the game interest for the variable display result being missed. Can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-26, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. If the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, when the advance notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is high. Since the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is executed by the patterns YE-3 and YE-4. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not become a big hit, the player against the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit when the pattern CI-3 and the patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed during the same variable display. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the above from being excessively raised.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, any one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. The execution ratio of the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 is set to 0% as a form of restricting the execution of the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 when the execution of the advance notice effect is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of 4 to 6 can be set as a set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 though the embodiment is exemplified by the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4. When the cut-in effect is set and the execution is decided in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the advance notice effect is given at a lower rate than the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2. It may be possible to execute with the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4. That is, in the present claim, "when the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect is included in the specific suggestion effect. To limit the execution of the second predetermined suggestion effect when is executed, the advance notice effect is not executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, and the advance notice effect is performed in the pattern YE-1. Also included is a mode in which the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4 is executed at a lower rate than the case where the pattern YE-2 is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-21, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ. In this case, if the set values are the same, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 in the high-accuracy high-base state is the cut-in effect in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state. It is set higher than the rate executed in pattern CI-3. Therefore, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect is produced in the variable display of the super reach γ out of line compared to the case where the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. Since the ratio of execution in the pattern CI-3 is high, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 in the high accuracy and high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high accuracy and high base state. Is able to improve the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 because it is easy for the player to continue the game even after the gaming state shifts to the low probability low base state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When executed, when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in rate is higher than when the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state. Although the embodiment in which the effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Moreover, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. When the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. ..

For example, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-21, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed is executed. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed by (PA2-4 or PB1-4) is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 208SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 (A) to 11-33 (E), when variable display is executed in a variable pattern (PB1-5) for executing a revival effect. May make the cut-in effect infeasible with pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, any of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even though the player recognizes that it is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that the revival effect is executed and the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the embodiment in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to be lower than that in the case of executing the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 11 is shown as a modified example 208SG-2. As shown in −34 (A) to 11-34 (D), when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of executing the variable display in the variable pattern. By doing so, for example, the player places more importance on whether or not the variable display result is a big hit than whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. In the case of, after the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, the revival effect is further executed and the variable display result is a big hit. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6. ), The cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is shown as a modified example 208SG-3. As shown in 11-35 (A) to 11-35 (C), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect is executed. When the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, while the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 1 to 3. In any case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the variable display result becomes a jackpot and the pachinko game machine 1 is set. It is confirmed that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and the revival effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result will be out of order during the reach effect of the super reach γ during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified to be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if the variable display result is out of order. By determining that the value is any of 4 to 6, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game for the player, but in this feature unit 208SG-3, the reach of the super reach γ is being produced. When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. However, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-26, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation. When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is executed. Illustrates a mode in which the advance notice effect can be executed by the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when the execution by the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (A) to 11-36 (C) as the modified example 208SG-4, the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect is decided to be executed with the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. If this is the case, the cut-in effect will be performed with pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when execution is decided with pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with a low expectation of big hits. It may be feasible. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2. By executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than that, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result is out of alignment, so that the variable display result can be obtained. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 (C) to 11-21 (E), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. And when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ, if the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state, the gaming state is low if the set values are the same. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the case of the low accuracy base state or the low accuracy high base state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a modification. As shown in FIG. 11-37 as 208SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and is variably displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When is executed, if the gaming state is a low-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, if the set values are the same, the gaming state is cut at a higher rate than in the high-accuracy high-base state. The in-effect may be executed by the pattern CI-3.

By doing so, when the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, the rate during the reach production of the super reach γ is higher than that when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Since the cut-in effect is easily executed by the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit for a long period of time (for example, 1000 variable displays) in the low accuracy low base state, so that the player When the motivation to continue playing the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Is notified to the player, so that the player's willingness to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state can be improved.

In the present modification 208SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. At that time, when the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in effect is produced at a higher rate than when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Although the embodiment that can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modification 208SG-6 as shown in FIG. 11-38. When the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the gaming state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state. In the case of, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, while the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3 when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the low-determined base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, in which the variable display result is less likely to be a big hit than the high-based state, Can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (A) and 11-39 (B) as the modified example 208SG-7, during the reach production of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko game is performed instead of the cut-in effect. The set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be executable. When the set value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ in this way, a period before the executable period (during the reach effect) of the set value suggestion effect (for example). , The period from the start of the variable display to the reach), the above-mentioned advance notice effect may be executed, and the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect may be different depending on the effect pattern of the advance notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the set value is higher than that when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It suffices to make the suggestion effect feasible. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which effect pattern the advance notice effect is executed in, and when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, , Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the set value suggestion effect.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

Variable display is feasible, controllable to an advantageous state favorable to the player, and a plurality of setting values including a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value having a higher advantage for the player than the disadvantage setting value. It is a game machine that can set one of the set values from among them.
A suggestion display whose display mode can be changed stepwise can be displayed, and an effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to a change in the display mode of the suggestion display to a specific stage is provided.
The effect executing means has a first display pattern that changes to the specific stage during the variable display when the display of the suggestion display is started, and from the specific stage during the variable display when the display of the suggestion display is started. The suggestion display can be displayed in any pattern including at least a second display pattern that changes to the previous stage and changes to the specific stage during the variable display after the variable display.
The specific effect is an effect that is executed over a predetermined period while suggesting the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state.
When the suggestion display is displayed in the second display pattern, the effect executing means takes a shorter period than the predetermined period after the suggestion display changes in the variable display in which the suggestion display is started. When the variable display ends and the variable display ends, a notification is given to the effect that the suggestion display continues to be displayed.
further,
A decidable means capable of deciding to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled in a mode including the specific suggestion effect and a mode not including the specific suggestion effect,
With
The suggestion effect execution means
When the disadvantage setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific suggestion effect cannot be executed.
When the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggestion effect in an aspect including the specific suggestion effect can be executed.
When the suggestion effect is executed, it has a special pattern in which it is once suggested that it is not controlled to the advantageous state and then it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the suggestion effect in the aspect including the specific suggestion effect is executed is the rate at which the suggestion effect in the mode not including the specific suggestion effect is executed. A game machine characterized by being lower than.